Mercury - Sable - Owners Manual - (1995)

File:fcpis.ex Update:Thu Dec 21 08:19:24 1995 [PI00090(S )04/95] thirty-six pica chart: File:fcpis.ex Update:Thu Dec 21 08:19:24 1995 *[PI00100(ALL)04/95] thirty-six pica chart: File:fcpis.ex Update:Thu Dec 21 08:19:24 1995 *[PI00560(ALL)04/01] Table of Contents Introductory Information ............................... 1 Safety Restraints .............................................. 9 Starting Your Sable ....................................... 61 Warning Lights and Gauges ....................... 73 Instrument Panel Controls .......................... 91 Steering Column Controls ........................ 115 Features .......................................................... 125 Electronic Sound Systems ......................... 169 Driving Your Sable ..................................... 191 Roadside Emergencies ................................ 217 Customer Assistance ................................... 235 Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 243 Accessories .................................................... 247 Servicing Your Sable .................................. 255 Quick Index .................................................. 335 Index ............................................................... 347 Service Station Information ...................... 364 File:fcins.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:13:48 1995 Introductory Information *[IN00300(ALL)04/95] *[IN00400(ALL)04/95] Ford’s Commitment to You At Ford Motor Company, excellence is the continuous commitment to achieve the best result possible. It is dedication to learning what you want, determination to develop the right concept, and execution of that concept with care, precision, and attention to detail. In short, excellence means being the standard by which others are judged. *[IN00500(ALL)04/95] *[IN00600(ALL)04/95] Our Guiding Principles *[IN00700(ALL)04/95] ❑ You are the focus of everything we do. Our *[IN00750(ALL)04/95] ❑ Continuous improvement is essential to our *[IN00800(ALL)04/95] ❑ Employee involvement is our way of life. ❑ Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, the quality of our products and services must be our number one priority. work must be done with you in mind, providing better products and services than our competition. success. We must strive for excellence in everything we do: in our products — in their safety and value — and in our services, our human relations, our competitiveness, and our profitability. We are a team. We must treat one another with trust and respect. 1 File:fcins.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:13:48 1995 *[IN00900(ALL)04/95] ❑ Dealers and suppliers are our partners. We *[IN01000(ALL)04/95] ❑ Integrity is never compromised. Our conduct *[IN01100(ALL)04/95] Things to Know About Using This Guide *[IN01200(ALL)04/95] Congratulations on the purchase of your new vehicle. This guide has information about the equipment and the options for your new vehicle. You may not have bought all of the options available to you. If you do not know which information applies to your vehicle, talk to your dealer. *[IN01300(ALL)04/95] This guide describes equipment and gives specifications for equipment that was in effect when this guide was approved for printing. Ford may discontinue models or change specifications or design without any notice and without incurring obligation. *[IN01400(ALL)04/95] As you read through your owner guide, carefully read all Warnings because they tell you how to avoid endangering yourself, your passengers, and other people. must maintain mutually beneficial relationships with dealers, suppliers, and our other business associates. worldwide must be pursued in a manner that is socially responsible and commands respect for its integrity and for its positive contributions to society. 2 File:fcins.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:13:48 1995 *[IN01500(ALL)04/95] *[IN01600(ALL)04/95] Finding Information in This Guide *[IN01700(ALL)04/95] The Quick Index at the end of the book provides a page number following each item which indicates where detailed information can be found. *[IN01900(ALL)04/95] To use the Index, turn to the back of the book and search in the alphabetical listing for the word that best describes the information you need. If the word you chose is not listed, think of other related words and look them up. We have designed the Index so that you can find information under a technical term. *[IN02000(ALL)04/95] *[IN02100(ALL)04/95] Canadian Owners — French Version % After you have read this guide once, you will probably return to it when you have a specific question or need additional information. To help you find specific information quickly, you can use the Quick Index or the Index. French Owner Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3. 3 File:fcins.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:13:48 1995 *[IN02400(ALL)04/95] Your Maintenance Schedule and Record Booklet *[IN02500(ALL)03/95] The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet lists the services that are most important for keeping your vehicle in good condition. A record log is also provided to help you keep track of all services performed. *[IN02600(ALL)01/95] *[IN02700(ALL)04/95] About the Warranties % Your vehicle is covered by three types of warranties: Basic Vehicle Warranty, Extended Warranties on certain parts, and Emissions Warranties. % Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefully to find out about your vehicle’s warranties and your basic rights and responsibilities. *[IN03300(ALL)03/95] If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, you can get a new one free of charge. Contact any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, or refer to the addresses and phone numbers on the first page of this owner guide. *[IN03100(ALL)03/95] 4 File:fcins.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:13:48 1995 *[IN04000(ALL)01/95] *[IN04100(ALL)01/94] Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan *[IN04200(ALL)01/95] You do not have to buy this option when you buy your vehicle. However, your option to purchase the Ford Extended Service Plan runs out after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See your dealer for more details about the Ford Extended Service Plan. *[IN04250(ALL)01/95] If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of purchase, you may still be eligible. See your dealer for the details. *[IN06000(ALL)01/95] *[IN06100(ALL)03/95] Breaking Your Vehicle In % % *[IN06300(ALL)01/95] % If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you can buy a Ford Extended Service Plan for your vehicle. This optional contract provides service protection for a longer period of time than the basic warranty that comes with your vehicle. Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment or break-in period during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) that you drive it. During the break-in period, you need to pay careful attention to how you drive your vehicle. ❑ Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehicle has new brake linings, you should take these steps: *[IN06400(ALL)01/95] — Watch traffic carefully so that you can anticipate when to stop. *[IN06500(ALL)01/95] *[IN06600(ALL)01/95] *[IN06700(ALL)01/95] — Begin braking well in advance. — Apply the brakes gradually. The break-in period for new brake linings lasts for 100 miles (160 km) of city driving or 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway driving. 5 File:fcins.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:13:48 1995 *[IN06800(ALL)01/95] % ❑ Use only the type of engine oil that Ford recommends. See Engine oil recommendations in the Index. Do not use special “break-in” oils. [IN06810(ALL)04/95] Safety Labels [IN06820(ALL)04/95] There are labels, decals and tags on your vehicle to alert you about possible hazards. The signal word on the label tells you the degree of hazard and is used in the following ways: [IN06830(ALL)04/95] ❑ DANGER: Used to indicate the presence of a hazard which will cause severe personal injury or death if the warning is ignored. [IN06840(ALL)04/95] ❑ WARNING: Used to indicate the presence of a hazard which can cause severe personal injury or death if the warning is ignored. [IN06850(ALL)04/95] ❑ CAUTION: Used to indicate the presence of a hazard which will or can cause minor personal injury or property damage if the warning is ignored. 6 File:fcins.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:13:48 1995 % Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle *[IN07001(ALL)04/95] Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage the paint, especially in hot weather. Wash your vehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean. *[IN07101(ALL)04/95] Take similar precautions if your vehicle is exposed to chemical industrial fallout. *[IN07201(ALL)08/95] Paint damage resulting from fallout is not related to a defect in paint materials or workmanship and therefore is not covered by warranty. Ford, however, believes that continual improvement in customer satisfaction is a high priority. For this reason, Ford has authorized its dealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by environmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comes first. Customers may be required to bring their vehicle in for inspection by a Ford representative. *[IN06900(ALL)04/95] % Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle [IN07401(ALL)03/95] Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the underside, with a cleaner made for washing cars. If your vehicle has clear-coat, make sure that the cleaner is recommended for clear-coat. *[IN07501(ALL)04/95] *[IN07601(ALL)04/95] *[IN07701(ALL)04/95] DO NOT: *[IN07801(ALL)04/95] *[IN07901(ALL)04/95] ❑ Wash your vehicle while the body is hot *[IN07301(ALL)04/95] ❑ Wash your vehicle with hot water ❑ Wash your vehicle while it sits in direct sunlight Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits and protect the finish. 7 File:fcins.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:13:48 1995 *[IN08101(ALL)04/95] *[IN08201(ALL)04/95] Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts *[IN08301(ALL)04/95] *[IN08401(ALL)04/95] Cleaning Plastic Parts *[IN08501(ALL)04/95] Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents or petroleum-based cleaners. % % *[IN08701(ALL)04/95] % Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a mild detergent. Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, fuel or strong detergents. Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are plastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover if necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routine cleaning. If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove oversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oil remover. If rustproofing is not removed from plastic and rubber parts, it can cause deterioration. 8 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 Safety Restraints % *[SR00500(ALL)04/95] *[SR00600(ALL)03/95] Important Safety Belt Information The use of safety belts helps to restrain you and your passengers in case of a collision. In most states and in Canada the law requires their use. *[SR00700(ALL)01/95] *[SR00800(ALL)01/95] *[SR00900(ALL)01/95] *[SR01000(ALL)01/95] *[SR01100(ALL)01/95] *[SR01200(ALL)01/95] *[SR02200(ALL)04/95] Safety belts provide best restraint when: *[SR02300(ALL)01/95] See the following sections in this chapter for directions on how to properly use these safety belts. Also see Safety Restraints for Children in this chapter for special instructions about using safety belts for children. ❑ the seatback is upright ❑ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched) ❑ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips ❑ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest ❑ the knees are straight forward To help you remember to fasten your safety belt, a warning light may come on and a chime may sound. See Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime in the Warning Lights and Gauges chapter. 9 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR02400(ALL)03/95] % RWARNING Make sure that you and your passengers, including pregnant women, wear safety belts. Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt portion of your safety belt snug and low across the hips. This will reduce the risk of serious injury to the abdomen or neck that could be caused by sliding under the safety belts in a collision. If safety belts are not used properly, the risk of you or your passengers being injured in a collision greatly increases. *[SR02700(ALL)03/95] RWARNING Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Never swing it around the neck over the inside shoulder. Never use a single belt for more than one person or across more than one seating position. Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. Failure to follow these precautions could increase the risk and/or severity of injury in a collision. 10 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR02850(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Never drive or ride with a twisted or jammed safety belt. If you cannot untwist or unjam the safety belt, see the nearest qualified technician immediately. *[SR02900(ALL)04/95] RWARNING Children should always ride with the seatback in the fully upright position. When the seatback is not fully upright, there is a greater risk that the child will slide under the safety belt and be seriously injured in a collision. *[SR03000(ALL)04/95] RWARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. *[SR03200(ALL)02/95] Lock the doors of your vehicle before driving to lessen the risk of the door coming open in a collision. [SR03600(ALL)03/95] Combination Lap and Shoulder Belts *[SR03900(ALL)02/95] While your vehicle is in motion, the combination lap and shoulder belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the lap and shoulder belt locks and helps reduce your forward movement. 11 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR04000(ALL)02/95] After you get into your vehicle, close the door and lock it. Then adjust the seat to the position that suits you best. *[SR04100(ALL)08/95] Pull the combination lap/shoulder belt from the retractor so that the shoulder portion of the belt crosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If it is, remove the twist. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on tongue. *[SR04200(ALL)01/95] quarter page art:0010018-B Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt *[SR04300(ALL)02/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understand Important Safety Belt Information at the beginning of this chapter. [SR04500(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0000685-I Unfastening the combination lap and shoulder belts — front and rear outboard seating positions 12 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR04700(ALL)03/95] While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to its original position to prevent it from striking you or the vehicle. [SR05625(ALL)04/95] Safety Belts for Front Outboard Passenger and Rear Outboard Seating Positions (Except Wagon Rear-Facing Seat) [SR05650(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for the front seat outboard passenger and rear outboard passengers. *[SR05670(ALL)03/95] Dual locking mode retractors operate in two ways: *[SR05675(ALL)03/95] *[SR05700(ALL)03/95] Vehicle Sensitive (Emergency) Locking Mode *[SR05725(ALL)04/95] *[SR05750(ALL)03/95] Automatic locking mode *[SR05775(ALL)00/00] *[SR05800(ALL)03/95] *[SR05810(ALL)03/95] ❑ A tight lap/shoulder belt on the occupant. ❑ Child safety seat installation. % In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will allow the occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on hard braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The retractor can also be made to lock by pulling on the belt. In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will be automatically locked and will remain locked when the combination lap/shoulder safety belt is buckled, and does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode provides the following: RWARNING Rear-facing infant seats should never be placed in the front seats. 13 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR05825(ALL)03/95] This mode must be used when installing a child safety seat on the front passenger seat and rear outboard seats where dual locking retractors are provided. *[SR05830(ALL)04/95] To switch the retractor from the emergency locking mode to the automatic locking mode, perform the following steps: *[SR05875(ALL)03/95] *[SR05900(ALL)03/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is extracted, and when allowed to retract, a clicking sound will be heard. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). *[SR05925(ALL)04/95] 3. A clicking sound will continue to be heard as the belt is allowed to retract. This indicates that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. *[SR05930(ALL)04/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract completely, the retractor will switch to the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. See the detailed instructions under Safety Seats for Children in this chapter. *[SR05940(ALL)04/95] *[SR05950(ALL)04/95] *[SR05960(ALL)03/95] Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment [SR05962(ALL)03/95] To adjust the belt down, pinch the release button. To adjust the belt up, slide the adjuster up. (You do not have to pinch the release button.) % Driver and right front passenger You can adjust the shoulder belt height to one of five (5) positions. 14 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR05964(ALL)03/95] Make sure the adjuster is firmly in one of the five positions. The belt should be adjusted up or down until the belt rests on your shoulder near your neck. [SR05966(ALL)03/95] one third page art:0001402-B The shoulder belt height adjuster *[SR05968(ALL)04/95] RWARNING Position the shoulder belt height adjuster so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Be sure the shoulder belt is properly positioned on your shoulder each time you use the belt. If the shoulder belt is off your shoulder, on your upper arm or neck, there is a greater risk of severe injury in a collision. [SR06000(ALL)04/95] Safety Belts for Rear-Facing Occupants (Wagon) [SR06050(ALL)04/95] RWARNING If you have a wagon, never use child safety seats in the third seat. Safety seats for children are not intended for use in rear facing seats. 15 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 [SR06060(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with safety seat belts containing a cinch tongue at the rear-facing seating positions. *[SR06075(ALL)03/95] The locking cinch tongue will slide up and down the belt webbing when the belt is in the stowed position or while putting seat belts on. When the locking cinch tongue of the lap/shoulder combination seat belt is latched into the buckle, the cinch tongue will allow the lap portion to become shorter, but locks the webbing in place to restrict it from becoming longer. *[SR06125(ALL)03/95] Before you can reach and latch a combination lap and shoulder belt having a cinch tongue into the buckle, you may have to lengthen the lap belt portion of it. To lengthen the lap belt, pull some webbing out of the shoulder belt retractor. While holding the webbing below the tongue, grasp the tip (metal portion) of the tongue so that it is parallel to the webbing and slide the tongue upward. Provide enough lap belt length so that the tongue can reach the buckle. *[SR06151(ALL)03/95] NOTE: If you grasp the tongue by the tongue cover to lengthen the belt, the tongue cover will grab the webbing, making it difficult to slide. *[SR06175(ALL)03/95] To fasten a cinch tongue, pull the combination lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that the shoulder belt portion of the safety belt crosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the belt is twisted remove the twist. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling of the tongue. 16 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR06201(ALL)03/95] RWARNING Make sure that the lap belt is as low around your hips as possible. Do not wear the lap belt around your waist. If you do not use the lap belts properly, the risk of being injured in a collision greatly increases. *[SR06225(ALL)03/95] RWARNING All front and rear seat outboard occupants (including pregnant women) should wear lap and shoulder belts, for optimum protection in a collision. *[SR06251(ALL)03/95] RWARNING Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Never swing it around your neck over the inside shoulder. Never use a single belt for more than one person. Failure to follow these precautions could increase the risk and/or severity of injury in a collision. *[SR06275(ALL)03/95] Due to folding rear seats, sometimes the buckles and tongues toward the center of the vehicle may be hidden by the rear edge of the seat cushion. Pull them out so they will be accessible. *[SR06301(ALL)03/95] While you are fastened in the seat belt, the combination lap/shoulder belt with a cinch tongue adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, 17 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 the safety belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement. [SR06500(ALL)03/95] To unfasten the belt, push the red release button on the end of the buckle. This allows the tongue to unlatch from the buckle. While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to its original position to prevent it from striking you or the vehicle. [SR06550(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0000029-F Unfastening the combination lap and shoulder belts for the rear-facing third seat (wagon) [SR06560(ALL)04/95] Center Occupant Rear Safety Belt (Sedan) [SR06565(ALL)04/95] The safety belt in the center rear seating position has a detachable shoulder belt. [SR06570(ALL)04/95] To attach the shoulder belt to the lap belt, pull the shoulder belt out from the retractor in the seatback and insert the lap belt connecting pin into the wide end of the key-slot on the shoulder belt as shown in Figure 1. Pull the connecting pin into the narrow end of the key-slot until you hear a snap and feel it latch. See Figure 2. Make sure the shoulder belt is securely fastened to the lap belt by pulling up on the shoulder belt. 18 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 [SR06575(ALL)04/95] half page art:0001371-B The reverse side of the lap belt and the detachable shoulder belt [SR06580(ALL)04/95] half page art:0001372-A The reverse side of the shoulder belt attached to the lap belt 19 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 [SR06585(ALL)04/95] RWARNING The rear center lap belt must be tightened separately from the shoulder strap. The lap belt must fit snugly, and as low as possible around the hips. Do not wear around your waist. For information about adjusting the belt, see “LAP BELTS” in this chapter. [SR06590(ALL)04/95] Detach the shoulder belt before folding down the passenger side rear seat. To detach the shoulder belt, slide the connecting pin to the wide end of the key-slot and lift the shoulder belt off the connecting pin. As the shoulder belt retracts, guide the belt so that it does not strike you or the vehicle. % Lap Belts [SR06650(ALL)03/95] The lap belts in the center front seating position (if equipped) and center rear seat (wagon) do not adjust automatically. You must adjust them to fit snugly and as low as possible around your hips. Do not wear the lap belt around your waist. [SR06675(ALL)04/95] The front center seat belt buckle and tongue are stowed in a pocket between the seat cushion and seatback. Remove them from the stowage pocket before fastening. *[SR06700(ALL)03/95] Pull the belt across your hips and insert the tongue into the correct buckle on your seat until you hear a snap and feel it lock. Make sure the buckle is securely fastened. *[SR06601(ALL)04/95] *[SR06750(ALL)02/95] % If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it and tip the belt tongue at a right angle to the belt. Pull the belt tongue over your lap until it reaches the buckle. 20 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR06800(ALL)02/95] If you need to shorten the belt, pull on the loose end of the webbing until the belt fits snugly. [SR06850(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0000029-F Unfastening the lap belts for the center front and center rear seating positions *[SR06900(ALL)02/95] [SR06925(ALL)03/95] To unfasten the belt, push the release button on the end of the buckle. This allows the tongue to unlatch from the buckle. RWARNING Make sure that the lap belt is as low around your hips as possible. Do not wear the lap belt around your waist. If you do not use the lap belts properly, the risk of being injured in a collision greatly increases. *[SR07750(ALL)02/95] *[SR07800(ALL)02/95] Safety Belt Extension Assembly [SR07850(ALL)02/95] This assembly is not for use in the wagon rear-facing seat. % For some people, the safety belt may be too short even when it is fully extended. You can add about eight inches (20 cm) to the belt length with a safety belt extension assembly (part number 611C22). Safety belt extensions are available at no cost from your dealer. 21 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 [SR07900(ALL)02/95] RWARNING The use of the safety belt extension assembly, in the wagon rear-facing seat will affect the performance of the safety belts and increase the risk of personal injury. *[SR07925(ALL)03/95] RWARNING Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. Do not use extension to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. Failure to follow these instructions will affect the performance of the safety belts and increase the risk of personal injury. *[SR07950(ALL)03/95] *[SR07970(ALL)04/95] % *[SR07980(ALL)04/95] % Safety Belt Maintenance Check the safety belt systems periodically to make sure that they work properly and are not damaged. All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. Ford recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision 22 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 was minor and a qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. *[SR08400(ALL)04/95] *[SR08500(ALL)04/04] Cleaning the Safety Belts % Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) *[SR14650(ALL)04/95] The driver and right front passenger air bags are Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS), provided at these seating positions in addition to the lap/shoulder belt, and are designed to supplement the protection provided to properly belted occupants in moderate to severe frontal collisions. The supplemental air bag system does not provide restraint to the lower body. *[SR14800(ALL)02/95] *[SR14900(ALL)01/95] The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts % *[SR14300(ALL)04/95] % Clean the safety belts with any mild soap solution that is recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye the belt webbing because this may weaken it. RWARNING ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SAFETY BELT! 23 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR14950(ALL)01/94] RWARNING All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always wear their safety belts, whether or not an air bag Supplemental Restraint System is also provided at their seating position. Failure to do so may increase the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a collision. *[SR15000(ALL)01/95] There are four very important reasons to use safety belts even with an air bag system. Use your safety belts to: *[SR15100(ALL)01/95] ❑ help keep you in the proper position (away *[SR15200(ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side or *[SR15300(ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisions *[SR15400(ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of being thrown from your *[SR15500(ALL)01/95] *[SR15600(ALL)02/95] The Importance of Being Properly Seated % from the air bag) when it inflates rear impact collisions, because an air bag is not designed to inflate in such situations that are not severe enough to activate the supplemental air bag vehicle In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremely fast to help provide additional protection for you. In order to do this, the air bag must inflate with considerable force. If you are not seated in a normal riding position with your back against the seatback, the air bag may not protect you properly and could possibly hurt you as it inflates. 24 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR16000(ALL)01/95] RWARNING If a passenger is not properly seated and restrained, an inflating air bag could cause serious injury. *[SR16100(ALL)11/94] RWARNING Rear-facing infant seats should never be placed in the front seat. *[SR16200(ALL)03/95] In rear-facing infant seats, the infant’s head is closer to the air bag. The force of the rapidly inflating air bag could push the top of the rear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback or center armrests (if so equipped), or center console (if so equipped). REAR-FACING INFANT CARRIERS MUST ALWAYS BE SECURED IN THE REAR SEAT, and other child safety seats and infant seats should be secured in the rear seat whenever possible. 25 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR16250(ALL)03/94] RWARNING Your vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger air bag. Front passengers, especially children and small adults, should never sit on the edge of the seat, stand near the glove compartment of the instrument panel, or lean over with their faces near the glove compartment when the vehicle is moving. All occupants should sit with their backs against the seatback and use the safety belts. Children weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) should use child or infant seats. Forward-facing child seats must have the passenger seat moved as far back from the instrument panel as possible. REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BE USED IN THE FRONT SEAT, BECAUSE THE FORCE OF THE RAPIDLY INFLATING PASSENGER AIR BAG COULD PUSH THE TOP OF THE REAR-FACING SEAT AGAINST THE VEHICLE SEATBACK, CENTER ARMRESTS OR CONSOLE (IF SO EQUIPPED). REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYS BE PLACED IN THE REAR SEAT. 26 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR16300(ALL)06/94] RWARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the air bag module covers (identified by the letters “SRS”) on the steering wheel and instrument panel, or in front seat areas that may come in contact with a deploying air bag, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. Failure to follow this instruction may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision. *[SR16350(ALL)04/95] For further information about the proper mounting of equipment in the front seat of this vehicle, please refer to Ford’s brochure entitled Some Important Information About Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System which can be obtained by calling Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356. Ask for brochure FPS-8602. *[SR16400(ALL)01/95] For additional important safety information on the proper use of seat belts, child seats, and infant seats, please read the other sections of this part of the Owner Guide, especially sections entitled Safety Belts for Children and Safety Seats for Children. 27 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 % How the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System Operates [SR16600(ALL)05/95] The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System consists of the Driver and Passenger air bags, impact sensors, a system diagnostic module, a readiness light and tone, and the electrical wiring which connects the components. *[SR16750(ALL)04/95] The driver air bag is in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger seat air bag is located in the center of the instrument panel ledge above the glove compartment. Both air bags are designed to stay out of sight until they are activated. *[SR16500(ALL)01/95] [SR16775(ALL)11/94] half page art:0001373-A The location of air bags and warning labels *[SR17400(ALL)02/95] If a collision occurs, the sensors sense the severity of the impact and activate the air bags if necessary. The air bag system is designed to deploy in frontal and front-angled collisions more severe than hitting a parked vehicle (of 28 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 similar size and weight) head-on at about 28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system senses the crash severity rather than vehicle speed, some frontal collisions at speeds above 28 mph (45 km/h) will not inflate the air bag. [SR17500(ALL)05/95] *[SR17580(ALL)01/95] When the sensors activate the system, the air bags inflate rapidly, filling with non-toxic gas mixture in a fraction of a second. Immediately after inflation, the air bags deflate by releasing the gas mixture through vent holes. The whole process takes place in a matter of seconds. RWARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not try to touch them after inflation. *[SR17710(ALL)03/93] half page art:0011063-A Inflated driver-side air bag 29 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR17730(ALL)05/94] half page art:0011064-A Inflated passenger-side air bag *[SR18400(ALL)01/95] RWARNING The air bag will inflate only once. The system is designed to function on a one-time-only basis. If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAG WILL NOT FUNCTION AGAIN AND MUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. If the air bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision. [SR18425(ALL)05/95] To ensure that the air bag system will operate as intended in a crash, the system is equipped with a diagnostic module. The diagnostic module monitors its own circuits, the air bag electrical system, the air bag readiness light, the air bag power, and the air bag inflators. 30 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 % The air bag system uses a readiness light on the instrument cluster and a tone to indicate the condition of the system. When you turn the ignition key to the ON position, this light will illuminate for approximately six (6) seconds and then turn off. This indicates that the system is operating normally. NOTE: Maintenance of the air bag system is not required. *[SR18475(ALL)03/95] A problem with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: *[SR18501(ALL)03/95] *[SR18525(ALL)03/95] ❑ the readiness light will either flash or stay lit, ❑ or it will not light immediately after ignition *[SR18550(ALL)03/95] ❑ or a group of five beeps will be heard. The *[SR18575(ALL)03/95] If any of these things happen, have the air bag system serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System may not function properly in the event of a collision. *[SR18450(ALL)03/95] *[SR18601(ALL)01/95] is turned on, tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired. RWARNING Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System; tampering could cause activation of the system and increase the risk of personal injury. DO NOT REPLACE OR OTHERWISE TAMPER WITH THE AIR BAG FUSES. For servicing of the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System, see your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. 31 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR19000(ALL)03/95] *[SR19500(ALL)03/95] % % [SR20200(ALL)01/95] *[SR20300(ALL)02/95] * Disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see your local Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Air bags MUST be disposed of by qualified personnel. Safety Restraints for Children In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by law to use safety restraints for children. If small children ride in your vehicle — this generally includes children who are four years old or younger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or less — you must put them in safety seats that are made specially for children. Safety belts alone do not provide maximum protection for these children. Check your local and state laws for specific requirements. *[SR20400(ALL)02/95] RWARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. *[SR20500(ALL)12/94] Make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained. If they are not restrained, the risk of their being injured in a collision greatly increases. *[SR20600(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Never let children or adults ride in the cargo area of your vehicle. Make sure that they sit where they can be properly restrained. If they are not restrained, the risk of their being injured in a collision greatly increases. 32 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR20650(ALL)02/95] RWARNING When possible, put children in the rear seat of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. *[SR20700(ALL)01/95] RWARNING When using any infant or child restraint system, it is important that you follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer concerning its installation and use. Failure to follow each of the restraint manufacturer’s instructions could increase the risk or severity of an injury in the event of a collision or sudden stop. *[SR20900(ALL)01/95] *[SR21000(ALL)01/95] Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them. RWARNING Never leave a child unattended in your vehicle. Always remove the key from the ignition and take it with you. 33 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR22000(ALL)01/95] *[SR22100(ALL)01/95] Safety Seats for Children [SR22125(ALL)04/95] Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether straps see Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps in this chapter. *[SR22150(ALL)02/95] When installing a child safety seat, be sure to use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position, and make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. % Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child. Always follow the safety seat manufacturer’s instructions when installing and using the safety seat. *[SR22400(ALL)01/95] % RWARNING Your vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger air bag. REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BE USED IN THE FRONT SEAT, BECAUSE THE FORCE OF THE RAPIDLY INFLATING PASSENGER AIR BAG COULD PUSH THE TOP OF THE REAR-FACING SEAT AGAINST THE VEHICLE SEATBACK, OR CENTER CONSOLE (IF SO EQUIPPED), OR CENTER ARMRESTS (IF SO EQUIPPED). ALWAYS PLACE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS IN THE REAR SEAT. When using forward-facing child seats in the front seat, always move the passenger seat as far back from the instrument panel as possible. Failure to follow these warnings could result in injury to the child. 34 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR22500(ALL)01/95] RWARNING All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or by the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. If you do not properly secure the safety seat to the vehicle, the risk is greater that a child, occupying the seat during a collision or sudden stop, will be injured. An unsecured safety seat could also injure other passengers in the vehicle. *[SR22600(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions that come with the safety seat that you put in your vehicle. Make sure that the shoulder belt (if provided at the seating position where the safety seat is being used) does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or neck. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. [SR22700(ALL)04/95] RWARNING If you have a wagon, never use child safety seats in the third seat. Safety seats for children are not intended for use in rear facing seats. 35 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR22720(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Always keep the buckle release button pointing upward and away from the child seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button as shown in the following illustration. Failure to follow these instructions could result in accidental unbuckling of the safety belt if the child safety seat hits the release button. Release of the safety belt could result in serious injuries. [SR22740(ALL)11/94] half page art:0011286-A Safety belt buckle placement for child seats 36 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 % Installing Child Safety Seats in the Front Passenger Seat and Outer Rear Seating Positions [SR22800(ALL)12/94] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for the front passenger seat and rear outer seats. The automatic locking mode must be used when installing a child seat or infant carrier in the front passenger seat or rear outer seats. *[SR22750(ALL)11/94] *[SR22850(ALL)11/94] RWARNING Never install a rear-facing child seat or infant carrier in the right front passenger seat. *[SR22901(ALL)03/95] If you choose to install a child safety seat in the front seating position, move vehicle seat as far back as possible. [SR22950(ALL)12/94] 1. Position the child seat on the passenger seat of the vehicle. 37 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR23001(ALL)03/95] 2. *[SR23050(ALL)04/95] half page art:0011238-B 38 Pull down on shoulder belt, then grasp shoulder belt and lap belt together. Figure 1. File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR23100(ALL)03/95] 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Be sure that the belt webbing is not twisted. *[SR23150(ALL)04/95] half page art:0011239-B Routing the lap/shoulder belt 39 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR23200(ALL)04/95] half page art:0011240-B Buckling the belt 40 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 [SR23250(ALL)11/94] 4. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard. At this time, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child seat restraint mode). Figure 4. *[SR23301(ALL)04/95] half page art:0011241-A Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode 41 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 [SR23350(ALL)11/94] 5. *[SR23401(ALL)04/95] half page art:0011242-A 42 Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder webbing. A clicking sound will be heard as the belt retracts. This indicates the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Push down on the child seat while you pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt. Figures 5 and 6. File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR23450(ALL)04/95] half page art:0011243-A 43 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR23501(ALL)03/95] 6. Before placing the child in the child seat, forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that the seat is securely held in place, Figure 7. *[SR23550(ALL)04/95] half page art:0011244-A Checking that the seat is secure 44 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR23601(ALL)11/94] 7. Double check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Try to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the belt is in the automatic locking mode, Figure 8. *[SR23650(ALL)04/95] half page art:0011245-B Checking the retractor [SR23701(ALL)11/94] 8. Check to make sure that the child seat is properly secured prior to each use. If the retractor is not locked, repeat steps 4 through 7. *[SR23750(ALL)03/95] NOTE: To remove the retractor from automatic lock mode, allow seat belt to retract fully to its stowed position and the retractor will automatically switch back to the vehicle sensitive locking mode for normal adult usage. 45 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR24750(ALL)01/95] RWARNING When using any infant or child restraint system, it is important that you follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer concerning its installation and use. Failure to follow each of the restraint manufacturer’s instructions could increase the risk or severity of an injury in the event of a collision or sudden stop. *[SR24800(ALL)04/95] *[SR24950(ALL)04/95] Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps *[SR25050(ALL)04/95] *[SR25150(ALL)04/95] Front Seats *[SR25250(ALL)04/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder belt (in the seat directly behind the front passenger seat in which the child safety seat will be installed). *[SR25350(ALL)04/95] 2. Pull all the stored belt out of the rear seat retractor to switch the retractor to automatic locking mode. *[SR25375(ALL)04/95] 3. Let the retractor wind up the slack from the lap/shoulder belt. % Some manufacturers make safety seats that include a tether strap that goes over the back of the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap as an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of your child safety seat for information about ordering a tether strap. To install a tether from a child safety seat in the front seat: 46 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR25425(ALL)04/95] 4. Install the child safety seat in the front seat. Refer to the previous section on Installing Safety Seats. Hook the tether strap hook around the webbing near the center of the shoulder portion of the locked lap/shoulder belt. *[SR25525(ALL)04/95] *[SR25550(ALL)04/95] *[SR25600(ALL)04/95] 5. Tighten the tether strap. [SR25725(ALL)04/95] Tether anchorage hardware [SR25800(ALL)04/95] Attachment holes (at each rear outboard seating position) have been provided in your vehicle to attach anchor hardware, if required. Kits can be obtained at no charge from any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. [SR26100(ALL)04/95] Be sure to follow the child safety seat manufacturer’s instructions. *[SR26500(ALL)04/95] Rear Seats If you use a tethered safety seat on one of the rear seats, you can anchor the strap to the appropriate tether anchor directly behind that seat position. RWARNING Tighten the anchor according to specifications. Otherwise, the safety seat may not be properly secured and the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. [SR26600(ALL)04/95] In a station wagon, you simply attach the tether strap to one of the anchors that are already installed for you. 47 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 [SR26615(ALL)04/95] Tether anchorage hardware [SR26630(ALL)04/95] All wagons have a tether anchor installed for each of the second row seating positions. [SR26700(ALL)04/95] two third page art:0000041-C Finding the tether anchors in the wagon [SR26750(ALL)04/95] 1. Behind the second seat, find the plastic snap-on covers for the floor anchors. [SR26801(ALL)04/95] 2. Use a screwdriver or coin to snap the covers off the anchor in a rearward and upward direction. Remove the covers completely. [SR26850(ALL)04/95] 3. Snap the tether strap hook onto the U-shaped tether anchor. 48 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 [SR26900(ALL)04/95] Built-In Child Seat (Wagon — If equipped) [SR26950(ALL)04/95] The second row seat may include an optional built-in child safety seat on the passenger side. The child restraint is to be used only by children who are at least one year old, weigh between 9 and 27 kilograms (20 and 60 pounds) and whose shoulders (top) are below the shoulder harness slots in the seatback. *[SR27000(ALL)04/95] If your child is less than one year old or weighs less than 9 kilograms (20 pounds), always use a rear facing infant or convertible seat because a child of that size is not sufficiently developed to withstand crash forces in a front facing position. Follow the specific manufacturer’s instructions for weight and height restrictions. *[SR27051(ALL)03/95] Children must be properly buckled before riding in the vehicle. It is the law in every state and province. This child seat conforms to all Federal/Canadian motor vehicle safety standards. *[SR27100(ALL)03/95] *[SR27150(ALL)04/95] Built-in child seat belt retractors [SR27251(ALL)04/95] The retractor will automatically snug the belts around the child. Frequently check the child seat’s lap and shoulder harness belts for correct placement and tightness. Use the child seat only if the harness belts will stay snug with a child buckled in the seat. If belts do not remain snug, take the vehicle to the dealer for child seat repair. The belts on the built-in child seat are equipped with a retractor that locks when both belt tongues are latched into the crotch safety belt buckled. 49 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR27300(ALL)03/95] RWARNING Always adjust the lap and shoulder harness belts provided with this child seat snugly around your child. *[SR27351(ALL)03/95] Never leave your child unattended in the vehicle. *[SR27400(ALL)03/95] The child seat’s metal and plastic parts can become very hot when left in the sun. These can cause burns to unprotected skin. *[SR27451(ALL)03/95] Failure to follow all of the instructions on the use of this child restraint system can result in your child striking the vehicle’s interior during a sudden stop or crash. *[SR27500(ALL)03/95] *[SR27551(ALL)03/95] How to use the Built-In Child Seat Read the following procedures and all of the labels on the Built-In Child Seat before using the seat. *[SR27600(ALL)03/95] RWARNING Never use the Built-In Child Seat as a booster cushion with the adult safety belts. A child using the adult belts could slide forward off the front edge of the child seat cushion and out from under the adult safety belts. 50 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 [SR27605(ALL)12/95] 1. Pull and release flap from top of seatback. See Figure 1. [SR27630(ALL)12/95] one third page art:0001500-A Figure 1: Releasing the flap [SR27651(ALL)04/95] 2. Grasp the child seat at the top of the seatback and pull the top forward to release the latch. See Figure 2. [SR27620(ALL)04/95] NOTE: The child seat cannot be opened unless the seatback is latched in the upright position. [SR27700(ALL)03/95] one third page art:0001452-B Figure 2: Releasing the latch [SR27780(ALL)12/95] 3. Continue to unfold the child seat until it rests on the seat as shown in Figure 3. 51 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 [SR27801(ALL)03/95] one third page art:0001453-B Figure 3: Opening the built-in child seat [SR27850(ALL)04/95] 4. Read the information and warnings on the child seat cushion and shoulder safety belt. Refer to Figure 4. Check the child’s size, weight and age to be sure the child is not too small or too large for the child seat. [SR27900(ALL)03/95] one third page art:0001454-A Figure 4: Child seat information and warnings *[SR28000(ALL)03/95] 5. If connected, squeeze the top and the bottom of the right half of the chest clip and pull to separate both halves. [SR28100(ALL)04/95] 6. Place the child on the child seat and position the shoulder belts over each shoulder. Refer to Figure 5. 52 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 [SR28125(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0001456-B Figure 5: Shoulder safety belt placement on the child [SR28150(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Read the following steps carefully to become familiar with the indicator windows located on each safety belt tongue and the chest clip. When either of the tongues or the chest clip is unbuckled, the color red appears in the window. When the tongues or chest clip are securely buckled, the color green appears. [SR28200(ALL)04/95] 7. [SR28220(ALL)12/95] NOTE: The indicator window on each tongue must appear green when buckled. [SR28240(ALL)12/95] NOTE: If a belt locks during extraction, allow belts to retract FULLY and repeat procedure. *[SR28250(ALL)04/95] Insert either the left or right safety belt tongue into the single opening of the crotch safety belt buckle as shown in Figure 6. (It does not matter which tongue is inserted first.) Then insert the other tongue. Allow belts to retract and fit snugly. RWARNING If both tongues do not latch in the buckle, do not use the child seat. See your dealer for repairs. 53 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 [SR28300(ALL)03/95] three fourths page art:0001457-B Figure 6: Fastening the crotch safety belt buckle 54 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 [SR28450(ALL)04/95] 8. Fasten both halves of the chest clip below the child’s shoulders and adjust it to comfortably hold the shoulder belts in place on the child’s chest. The color green must appear in the indicator window when fastened. (The purpose of this clip is to position the shoulder belts correctly on the child’s shoulders. The clip can be easily pulled apart and is designed to pull apart during a collision. The clip helps keep the belts on the shoulders of a sleeping or squirming child.) Refer to Figure 7. 55 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 [SR28500(ALL)03/95] three fourths page art:0001458-B Figure 7: Securing the chest clip 56 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 [SR28550(ALL)04/95] 9. Pull the shoulder belts out to ensure that the crotch safety belt buckle is securely fastened and the retractor is locked. Refer to Figure 8. [SR28575(ALL)04/95] half page art:0001455-B Figure 8: Checking for securely latched buckle and locked retractor [SR28600(ALL)04/95] 10. If the belts become too tight, unbuckle the crotch safety belt buckle allow belts to retract, then reinsert both belt tongues. [SR28650(ALL)04/95] To remove the child from the built-in child seat: [SR28700(ALL)04/95] 1. Squeeze the tabs on the top and bottom of the chest clip and pull the halves apart to open the chest clip. Refer back to Figure 7. [SR28750(ALL)04/95] 2. Press the release button on the crotch safety belt buckle. [SR28800(ALL)04/95] 3. Slide the shoulder belts off the child’s shoulders and remove the child. Refer back to Figure 5. 57 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 [SR28850(ALL)04/95] To stow the built-in child seat: *[SR28900(ALL)03/95] 1. Return the child seat cushion to the upright position. [SR28950(ALL)04/95] 2. Press firmly in the center and top of the child seat to place it in the stowed position. [SR28960(ALL)12/95] 3. Reattach the flap on the child seat to the top of the seatback. [SR29000(ALL)03/95] The seat can now be used by an adult or the seatback can be folded down. [SR29025(ALL)04/95] NOTE: The seatback cannot be folded down unless the child seat is fully stowed. *[SR29050(ALL)03/95] *[SR29100(ALL)03/95] Inspection after a collision RWARNING All built-in child restraints, including seats, buckles, retractors, seat latches, interlocks, and attaching hardware should be inspected by a qualified Dealer technician after any collision. If the child seat was in use during a collision, Ford recommends replacing it. However, if the collision was minor and a qualified technician finds that the child restraints do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Built-in child seats not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. [SR29150(ALL)04/95] Built-in child seat maintenance *[SR29200(ALL)03/95] Regularly inspect the lap and shoulder belts system of your child seat. See your Ford dealer if the shoulder belt webbing is frayed, or if the 58 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 buckle and tongue are damaged and/or do not function properly. % Cleaning [SR29300(ALL)04/95] Your built-in child seat may be cleaned with mild soap and water. Do not use household cleaners as they may weaken the webbing or damage the plastic parts. For your convenience, the liner is removable and can be machine-washed and air-dried. *[SR29500(ALL)03/95] *[SR29600(ALL)02/95] Safety Belts for Children *[SR29250(ALL)03/95] % *[SR29700(ALL)04/95] Children who are too large for child safety seats should always wear safety belts. (See instructions with your child seat, or contact its manufacturer, to determine maximum size of child that will safely fit in the seat.) RWARNING If safety belts are not properly worn and adjusted as described, the risk of serious injury to the child in a collision will be much greater. *[SR29800(ALL)04/95] RWARNING If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap and shoulder belts can be positioned so that it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. 59 File:fcsrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:02 1995 *[SR29900(ALL)04/95] To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts on children who have outgrown child safety seats, Ford recommends use of a belt-positioning booster seat that is labelled as conforming to all Federal motor vehicle safety standards. Belt-positioning booster seats raise the child and provide a shorter, firmer seating cushion that encourages safer seating posture and better fit of lap and shoulder belts on the child. A belt-positioning booster should be used if the shoulder belt rests in front of the child’s face or neck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly on both thighs, or if the thighs are too short to let the child sit all the way back on the seat cushion when the lower legs hang over the edge of the seat cushion. You may wish to discuss the specific needs of your child with your pediatrician. *[SR30000(ALL)04/95] RWARNING Do not use a belt-positioning booster with a lap-only belt. *[SR30100(ALL)04/95] RWARNING Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap and shoulder belts should always be worn snugly and below the hips, touching the child’s thighs. *[SR30200(ALL)04/95] RWARNING Children should always ride with the seatback in the fully upright position. When the seatback is not fully upright, there is a greater risk that the child will slide under the safety belt and be seriously injured in a collision. 60 File:fcsts.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:24 1995 Starting Your Sable *[ST03300(ALL)03/95] % [ST03400(ALL)01/95] * Ignition Understanding the Positions of the Ignition [ST03725(ALL)11/94] quarter page art:0000017-D The positions of the key in the ignition % ACCESSORY allows some of your vehicle’s electrical accessories such as the radio and the windshield wipers to operate while the engine is not running. [ST04100(ALL)10/89] LOCK locks the steering wheel. It also locks the gearshift for all vehicles with an automatic transaxle. [ST04175(ALL)03/95] The automatic transaxle gearshift must be in P (Park) to move the key to the LOCK position. *[ST04050(ALL)03/95] 61 File:fcsts.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:24 1995 *[ST04200(ALL)01/95] LOCK is the only position that allows you to remove the key. The LOCK feature helps to protect your vehicle from theft. % *[ST04300(ALL)03/95] If the key is stuck in the LOCK position, move your steering wheel left or right until the key turns freely. [ST04325(ALL)04/95] OFF allows you to shut off the engine and all accessories without locking the steering wheel or the automatic transaxle gearshift lever. *[ST04350(ALL)03/95] ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warning lights (except the brake system warning light) to make sure they work before you start the engine. The key returns to the ON position once the engine is started and remains in this position while the engine runs. *[ST04375(ALL)03/95] START cranks the engine. Release the key once the engine starts so that you do not damage the starter. The key should return to ON when you release it. The START position also allows you to test the brake warning light. *[ST04500(ALL)02/95] Removing the Key From the Ignition [ST06000(ALL)02/95] Procedures for removing the key from the ignition will be the same for both the columnand console-mounted gearshifts. *[ST06300(ALL)03/95] *[ST06400(ALL)01/95] 1. Put the gearshift in P (Park). 2. Set the parking brake fully. [ST06500(ALL)11/94] 3. Turn the ignition to the LOCK position. *[ST06600(ALL)03/95] 4. Remove the key. [ST07310(ALL)12/94] If you have difficulty in turning the key, rotate the steering wheel slightly because it may be binding. % *[ST07520(ALL)03/95] % If the driver’s door is open while the key is still in the ignition, a warning chime sounds. 62 File:fcsts.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:24 1995 *[ST07525(ALL)03/95] RWARNING Before you leave the driver’s seat, make sure that the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Set the parking brake fully and shut off the engine. Do not park your vehicle in N (Neutral). If you do not take these precautions, your vehicle may move suddenly and injure someone. *[ST07575(ALL)01/95] Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Further, on hot, sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe and possibly fatal injuries to people as well as animals. 63 File:fcsts.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:24 1995 *[ST08200(ALL)03/95] *[ST08300(ALL)05/94] *[ST08350(ALL)02/95] Starting Your Vehicle Preparing to Start Your Vehicle RWARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or other enclosed area. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes in this chapter for more instructions. *[ST08400(ALL)01/95] *[ST08500(ALL)01/95] Before you start your vehicle, do the following: 1. Make sure you and all your passengers buckle your safety belts. See Safety Restraints in the Index for more details. *[ST08600(ALL)03/95] 2. Make sure your headlamps and other accessories are turned off and the parking brake is set. [ST08850(ALL)11/94] 3. Make sure that the gearshift is in P (Park) before you turn the key. *[ST09150(ALL)03/95] Before you start your vehicle, you should test the warning lights on the instrument panel to make sure that they work. Refer to the Warning Lights and Gauges chapter. *[ST09310(ALL)02/95] *[ST09320(ALL)02/95] *[ST09330(ALL)03/95] Starting Your Engine 1. Follow the steps under Preparing to Start Your Vehicle at the beginning of this section. *[ST09340(ALL)03/95] *[ST09350(ALL)03/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when starting your engine. DO NOT use the accelerator while the vehicle is parked. % To start your engine: 64 File:fcsts.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:24 1995 *[ST09360(ALL)02/95] *[ST09370(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the key to the START position (cranking) until the engine starts. Allow the key to return to the ON position after the engine has started. If you have difficulty in turning the key, rotate the steering wheel slightly because it may be binding. *[ST09375(ALL)04/95] *[ST09381(ALL)04/95] For a cold engine: *[ST09385(ALL)04/95] ❑ At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If the *[ST09387(ALL)04/95] *[ST09390(ALL)04/95] For a warm engine: *[ST09400(ALL)04/95] Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter or flood the engine. *[ST09410(ALL)04/95] After you start the engine, let it idle for a few seconds. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and put the gearshift lever in gear. Release the parking brake. Slowly release the brake pedal and drive away in the normal manner. % % ❑ At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: If the engine does not start in fifteen (15) seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not flood the engine, then try again. engine does not start in five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not flood the engine, then try again. ❑ Do not hold the key in the START position for more than five (5) seconds at a time. If the engine does not start within five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to the OFF position. Wait a few seconds after the starter stops, then try again. 65 File:fcsts.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:24 1995 [ST09420(ALL)11/94] NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transaxle and has an interlock that prevents you from shifting out of P (Park) unless your foot is on the brake pedal. *[ST09480(ALL)04/95] *[ST09492(ALL)04/95] *[ST09494(ALL)04/95] If the engine does not start after two attempts: 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. 2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floor and hold it. *[ST09496(ALL)04/95] *[ST09497(ALL)04/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to the START position. 4. Release the ignition key when the engine starts. *[ST09498(ALL)04/95] 5. Release the accelerator gradually as the engine speeds up. Then drive away in the normal manner. *[ST09500(ALL)04/95] If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been triggered. For directions on how to reset the switch see Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter. *[ST10200(ALL)04/95] % A computer system controls the engine’s idle speed. When you start your vehicle, the engine’s idle speed normally runs high. These faster engine speeds will make your vehicle move slightly faster than its normal idle speed. It should, however, slow down after a short time. If it does not, have the idle speed checked. 66 File:fcsts.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:24 1995 *[ST10325(ALL)04/95] RWARNING If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, do not allow your vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes. Have the vehicle checked. Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage to the vehicle and may possibly result in personal injury. *[ST10350(ALL)04/95] RWARNING Do not park, idle, or operate your vehicle in tall, dry grass, or other dry ground areas. The high heat generated by engine and emissions components could start a ground fire. *[ST10500(ALL)03/95] If you consistently start your vehicle in subzero temperatures, use an engine block heater (if your vehicle has this option). % Engine Block Heater (If equipped) (Standard in Canada) *[ST10700(ALL)03/95] Engine block heaters are strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach -10˚F (-23˚C) or below. An engine block heater warms the engine coolant, which improves starting, warms up the engine faster, and allows the heater-defrost system to respond quickly. *[ST10900(ALL)01/95] To turn the heater on, simply plug it into a grounded 110-volt outlet. Ford recommends that you use a 110-volt circuit that is protected by a ground fault circuit interrupter. *[ST10600(ALL)03/95] 67 File:fcsts.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:24 1995 *[ST11000(ALL)03/95] For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before you start your vehicle. Using the heater for longer than three hours will not damage the engine, so you can plug it in at night to start your vehicle the following morning. *[ST11100(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. You can be injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection. % If the Engine Cranks but Does Not Start or Does Not Start After a Collision *[ST11300(ALL)04/95] *[ST11400(ALL)03/95] Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch [ST11500(ALL)03/95] Once the shut-off switch is triggered, you must reset the switch by hand before you can start your vehicle. If you have a sedan, the switch is on the right side of the trunk behind the trunk liner. If you have a wagon, it is behind the service panel on the right side of the cargo area. *[ST11200(ALL)03/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or does not start after a collision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been triggered. The shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. 68 File:fcsts.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:24 1995 [ST11600(ALL)11/94] half page art:0000399-E The right side of the trunk in the sedan [ST11700(ALL)11/94] one third page art:0000516-E Inside the right side service panel in the wagon 69 File:fcsts.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:24 1995 *[ST11800(ALL)03/95] RWARNING If you see or smell fuel, do not reset the switch or try to start your vehicle. You could injure yourself or others. Have all the passengers get out of the vehicle and call the local fire department or a towing service. *[ST11900(ALL)03/95] If your engine cranks but does not start after a collision or substantial jolt: *[ST11950(ALL)04/95] *[ST12000(ALL)03/95] *[ST12050(ALL)01/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. 2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel. 3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the red reset button on the fuel pump shut-off switch down. *[ST12100(ALL)03/95] 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position for a few seconds, then turn it to the OFF position. *[ST12150(ALL)03/95] 5. Check under the vehicle again for leaking fuel. If you see or smell fuel, do not start your vehicle again. If you do not see or smell fuel, you can try to start your vehicle again. *[ST12200(ALL)03/95] 6. Check all vehicle warning lights before driving the vehicle. *[ST12225(ALL)01/95] *[ST12250(ALL)11/94] Pushing Vehicles with automatic transaxles cannot be started by pushing. Follow the directions under If Your Vehicle Needs a Jump-Start in the Roadside Emergencies Chapter. 70 File:fcsts.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:24 1995 [ST12300(ALL)02/95] Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes *[ST12400(ALL)02/95] Carbon monoxide, although colorless and odorless, is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. *[ST12500(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Never idle the engine in closed areas. Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for more than a short period of time with the engine running. Exhaust fumes, particularly carbon monoxide, may build up. These fumes are harmful and could kill you. *[ST12600(ALL)01/95] RWARNING If you ever smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect and fix your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. These fumes are harmful and could kill you. *[ST12700(ALL)01/95] Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked whenever: *[ST12800(ALL)02/95] *[ST12900(ALL)02/95] *[ST13000(ALL)01/95] *[ST13200(ALL)01/95] ❑ your vehicle is raised for service ❑ the sound of the exhaust system changes ❑ your vehicle has been damaged in a collision Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inlet vents clear of snow, leaves, and other debris. 71 File:fcsts.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:34:24 1995 *[ST13300(ALL)03/95] If the engine is idling while you are stopped in an open area for long periods of time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm). Also, adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in outside air. [ST13600(ALL)03/95] ❑ If you use the heater, set the fan speed on either medium or HI with the select knob on either R (floor) or VENT. [ST13900(ALL)03/95] ❑ If you use the air conditioner, set the fan speed on either medium or HI with the select knob on A/C. (Do not use MAX A/C.) [ST14000(ALL)03/95] ❑ If you use the automatic temperature control, set the fan speed on medium or high and press the S (panel and floor) or R (floor) manual override button. (Do not use AUTO or MAX A/C.) 72 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 Instrument Panel Controls % The main controls for the climate control system, clock, and radio are in the oval Integrated Control Panel on the instrument panel. [IP00410(ALL)04/95] The controls for the lights and climate control air registers are also on the instrument panel. *[IP00420(ALL)03/95] Clean the instrument panel lens and woodtone trim with a soft cloth and a glass cleaner. Do not use paper towel or any abrasive cleaner to clean either the lens or the woodtone trim as these may cause scratches. *[IP00400(ALL)04/95] *[IP00430(ALL)04/95] % NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases the gloss (shine) of the upper part of the instrument panel should be avoided. The dull finish in this area is to help protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection. 91 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP00470(ALL)04/95] full page art:0000661-J Instrument panel 92 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 % *[IP00500(ALL)01/95] *[IP00600(ALL)01/94] [IP00900(ALL)02/95] [IP01000(ALL)04/95] The Climate Control Systems Your vehicle has one of the following climate control systems: ❑ Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System ❑ Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) System *[IP01100(ALL)09/89] If you are not sure which system your vehicle has, see the diagrams on the following pages. [IP03150(ALL)11/94] Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System [IP03175(ALL)03/95] one third page art:0000698-E The knobs that control the manual heating and air conditioning system [IP03200(ALL)03/95] Fan speed knob [IP03250(ALL)03/95] The fan speed knob controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. There are four fan speeds: LO, medium/low (first dot), medium/high (second dot), and HI. 93 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP03300(ALL)03/95] Function selector knob [IP03351(ALL)04/95] The function selector knob controls airflow to the inside of the vehicle. [IP03401(ALL)03/95] MAX A/C [IP03450(ALL)03/95] MAX A/C uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. It allows for faster cooling but is noisier than A/C. The airflow will be from the instrument panel registers. [IP03501(ALL)03/95] A/C [IP03550(ALL)04/95] A/C uses outside air to cool the vehicle. It is quieter that MAX A/C, but not as economical. The airflow will be from the instrument panel registers. [IP03601(ALL)03/95] VENT [IP03650(ALL)03/95] VENT brings in outside air through the instrument panel registers. It can be used for heating or ventilating. [IP03701(ALL)03/95] OFF [IP03750(ALL)03/95] In OFF, outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. [IP03801(ALL)04/95] [IP03850(ALL)04/95] [IP03901(ALL)04/95] [IP03950(ALL)04/95] S (Panel and floor) This brings in outside air through the instrument panel registers and the front and rear floor ducts. It can be used for heating or ventilating. R (Floor) This allows for maximum heating. The airflow is from the front and rear floor ducts. 94 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP04001(ALL)04/95] [IP04050(ALL)04/95] [IP04100(ALL)04/95] P (Floor and defrost) This brings in outside air through the floor ducts and the windshield defroster ducts. It can be used for heating or ventilation. V (Defrost) [IP04150(ALL)04/95] This brings in outside air through the windshield defroster ducts. It can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield. [IP04200(ALL)03/95] Temperature control knob [IP04250(ALL)03/95] The temperature control knob may be adjusted from cool (blue range) to warm (red range). % Electronic Automatic Temperature Control System *[IP04725(ALL)02/95] The control for your Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) is located at the center of the instrument panel in the Integrated Control Panel and will operate only when the ignition is turned on to the ON position. *[IP04825(ALL)02/95] The EATC feature will maintain the temperature you select and automatically control the airflow for your comfort. It also allows you to override the automatic operation with manual override buttons. *[IP04700(ALL)04/95] 95 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP04925(ALL)03/95] full page art:0001285-D The Electronic Automatic Temperature Control System 96 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP05025(ALL)03/95] To turn your EATC on, press the AUTO button or any of the six manual override buttons along the bottom of the control. [IP05125(ALL)03/95] To turn your EATC off, press the OFF button. When the system is off, the Display window will be blank (dark). If you select AUTO, the system will automatically determine fan speed and airflow location. If a manual override button is selected, your selection determines airflow location only. Fan speed remains automatic unless you override it by pressing either side of the FAN speed button located at the extreme left of the control panel. To change the temperature, select any temperature between 65˚F (18˚C) and 85˚F (29˚C) by pressing the a or b side of the TEMP button. The EATC will display the selected temperature. To change the temperature display from Farenheit to Celsius, depress the MAX A/C and V F-DEF at the same time and hold them down for about a second. To change back to the original setting, repeat the process. If the battery is disconnected, the display will revert to Fahrenheit and must be reset to Celsius. [IP05225(ALL)02/95] [IP05325(ALL)03/95] [IP05400(ALL)04/95] [IP05425(ALL)03/95] If you want continuous maximum cooling, press the b side of the TEMP button until 60˚F (16˚C) is shown in the display window. Your EATC will cool at maximum and disregard the 60˚F (16˚C) setting until you select a warmer temperature with the a side of the TEMP button. If you want continuous maximum heating, press the a side of the TEMP button until 90˚F (32˚C) is shown in the display window. Your EATC will provide maximum heat regardless of the 90˚F (32˚C) setting until you select a cooler temperature with the b side of the TEMP button. 97 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP05525(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0001286-D The display window [IP05625(ALL)02/95] The display window will indicate the selected temperature and the operating function you have chosen: AUTO or one of the six manual overrides. It will also indicate manual control of the fan speed with the word FAN, H, and dots. The display window with all possible displays and their positions are shown here. Normally not all are shown at the same time but are included here to familiarize you with the names and symbols. *[IP05725(ALL)01/95] Automatic operation [IP05825(ALL)03/95] Press the AUTO button and select the desired temperature. The selected temperature and AUTO will be shown in the Display window. The EATC will automatically heat or cool to achieve the set temperature. Under normal conditions, your EATC will need no additional attention. [IP05925(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0001287-B The AUTO temperature display 98 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP06025(ALL)03/95] When in AUTO and weather conditions require heat, air will be sent to the floor. But a feature is included in your EATC to prevent blowing cold air to the floor if the engine coolant is not warm enough to allow heating. The EATC will direct the airflow to the windshield at low fan speed. In 3-1/2 minutes or less, the fan speed will start to increase and the airflow will change to the floor area. [IP06100(ALL)03/95] When in AUTO and weather conditions require cooling, the EATC will use outside air or recirculated air, depending on the temperature that is selected. [IP06125(ALL)04/95] If unusual conditions exist (i.e., window fogging, etc.), the six manual override buttons allow you to select special air discharge locations. The fan speed button allows you to adjust the fan speed to suit your needs. *[IP06225(ALL)03/95] Temperature selection [IP06325(ALL)04/95] The TEMP button at the upper left of the Control is for temperature selection. The a side of the TEMP button will increase the set temperature and the b side of the TEMP button will lower the set temperature. Pressing the button and releasing it will change the set temperature one degree. Holding either side of the button in will rapidly change the temperature setting in one degree increments to either 65˚F (18˚C) or 85˚F (29˚C). Then, the set temperature will jump 5˚F (3˚C) and stop at either 60˚F (16˚C) which is maximum cooling or 90˚F (32˚C) which is maximum heating. [IP06525(ALL)02/95] The average temperature range used is between 68˚F (20˚C) and 78˚F (26˚C). Changing the temperature setting by several degrees outside this range or overriding to 60˚ or 90˚F (16˚ or 32˚C) as described above will not speed up the heating or cooling process. 99 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP06625(ALL)11/94] Fan speed button [IP06725(ALL)04/95] Your EATC automatically adjusts the fan speed to the existing conditions. You must press AUTO for automatic fan speed operation. To control the fan speed yourself, use the button which will cancel the automatic fan speed control. The button is located at the left side of the EATC control panel. It is marked H. Press the (-) side for lower speeds. Press the (+) side for higher speeds. [IP06925(ALL)03/95] When you press the fan speed button, the fan speed will go to manual control. The display window will show the word FAN, H and a series of dots along with the selected temperature and operating function. [IP07025(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0001290-B The fan display [IP07125(ALL)03/95] You can override the fan speed at any time. If you use the button to control the fan speed, the EATC will continue to control the temperature but you control the fan speed. To return to auto fan control, press the AUTO button. If you are operating in one of the override functions (S, MAX A/C, etc.), automatic fan control will continue unless you press the fan speed button. To return to automatic fan control, press the AUTO button. The EATC will return to automatic operation. If you want to return to any override function, press the button for that function. The fan speed will continue to be automatically controlled. 100 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 *[IP07225(ALL)01/95] Manual override buttons [IP07325(ALL)04/95] Your EATC has six buttons which allow you to make special selections. The buttons are located along the bottom edge of the EATC and allow you to determine where the air will be discharged. Pressing any override button changes the air discharge location only. It does not affect the ability of the system to control temperature or the fan speed. Return to fully automatic operation by pushing the AUTO button. *[IP07425(ALL)01/95] MAX A/C button [IP07525(ALL)04/95] The MAX A/C feature allows for faster cooling because air is drawn from inside the vehicle. Using inside air causes the fan to sound louder which is normal for this selection. The display window will change to indicate MAX A/C and the airflow will be from the instrument panel registers. To exit, push AUTO or any of the other five manual override buttons. % VENT button [IP07725(ALL)03/95] Press this button to select outside air through the instrument panel registers. The display window will show the set temperature and VENT to the lower right of the temperature. Your EATC will heat the air if the temperature you have selected is warmer than the outside air coming into the vehicle. However, the air will NOT be cooled regardless of the temperature setting. Airflow will be from the instrument panel registers. *[IP07625(ALL)01/95] 101 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP07825(ALL)04/95] [IP07925(ALL)02/95] [IP08025(ALL)04/95] [IP08125(ALL)03/95] [IP08225(ALL)04/95] [IP08325(ALL)02/95] [IP08425(ALL)04/95] [IP08525(ALL)02/95] S (Panel and floor) button Push this button to get air from the floor and instrument panel registers at the same time. The display will show the set temperature and S. Depending on the selected temperature, the air will be automatically heated or cooled. R (Floor) Airflow will be to the floor when the R (floor) button is pressed. The display window will show the set temperature and R (floor) to the right of the temperature. Fan speed will be automatic unless manually controlled. If you override the fan speed and wish to return to automatic fan control, press AUTO. Then, again select R (floor) for airflow to the floor. P (Floor and defrost) Press this button to get air to the floor and windshield defrosters at the same time. The display will show the set temperature and P. If the outside temperature is about 50˚F (10˚C) and above, the air will be dehumidified to remove moisture. This will help to prevent fogging in humid weather. V F-DEF (Front defrost) Press the V F-DEF (front defrost) button to obtain maximum airflow to the windshield. Adjust the temperature setting as required for defrosting. The Display window will show the temperature setting with V to the right of the temperature. When the outside temperature is about 50˚F (10˚C) and above, the air will be dehumidified to remove moisture. This will help prevent fogging in humid weather. 102 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP08625(ALL)04/95] OUTSIDE TEMP button [IP08725(ALL)03/95] When this button is pressed, the temperature of the air outside of the vehicle will show in the display window. If the EATC is off, the display will go blank after 4 seconds. If the EATC is on, the outside temperature will be shown until the OUTSIDE Temp button is pressed a second time or another override button is pressed. *[IP08825(ALL)01/95] NOTE: The outside temperature reading is most accurate when the vehicle is moving. Higher readings may be obtained when the vehicle is not moving. The readings that you get may not agree with temperatures given on the radio due to differences in vehicle and station locations. *[IP08850(ALL)04/95] *[IP08875(ALL)04/95] Service [IP08925(ALL)04/95] Operating tips [IP09025(ALL)04/95] The following tips will help you to get the most satisfaction from your climate control system. [IP09125(ALL)04/95] If your EATC is not operating as described here, take it to your dealer to have it checked. System diagnostics are built in which will allow your dealer to readily identify problems that might occur. ❑ In humid weather, select V F-DEF (front defrost) before driving. This will help to prevent windshield fogging. After a few minutes of operation, switch to any desired selection. 103 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 *[IP09325(ALL)03/95] ❑ Do not put objects under the front seats that [IP09425(ALL)04/95] ❑ Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the air interfere with the flow of air to the back seat area. intake area of your climate control system which could block the air intake. The intake area is located at the bottom of the windshield, under the hood at the passenger side rear corner. [IP09500(ALL)03/95] ❑ If the air conditioner performs well in MAX A/C but not in A/C, this may indicate that the MicronAirH filter (if equipped) needs to be replaced. [IP10000(ALL)03/95] MicronAirH Air Filter (If equipped) *[IP10100(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle may have an air filter that removes pollen and road dust from outside air before it is directed to the interior of the vehicle. For maintenance of this filter, see Servicing Your Sable. [IP21650(ALL)04/95] Rear Window Defroster and Heated Side View Mirrors [IP21700(ALL)04/95] The defroster for the rear window clears frost, fog, or thin ice from both the inside and outside of the rear window and activates the heated side view mirrors. [IP21900(ALL)04/95] The button for the rear defroster and heated side view mirrors is on the instrument panel. [IP22200(ALL)04/95] one inch art:0000651-E The button that controls the rear window defroster and heated side view mirrors 104 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP22300(ALL)04/95] Clear away any snow that is on the rear window and side view mirrors before using the defroster. With the engine running, push the defrost button. After 10 minutes, the defroster will turn off. If the window and mirrors are still not clear, push the defroster button again. The defroster will turn off when the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. % NOTE: Never use sharp instruments or window cleaners with abrasives to clean the inside of your rear window. If you do, you may damage the heating elements that are bonded to the inside of the rear window and cause damage to the rear window defroster. [IP23200(ALL)04/95] Liftgate Window Wiper and Washer (If equipped) *[IP23000(ALL)03/94] [IP23401(ALL)04/95] quarter page art:0000696-E The liftgate window wiper and washer switches [IP23500(ALL)04/95] To turn on the liftgate window wiper, press the b switch. To turn the liftgate window wiper off, press the switch again. [IP23550(ALL)04/95] To turn on the liftgate window washer, press the d switch. When the d switch is pressed, it also turns on the liftgate wiper. 105 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 % *[IP23600(ALL)01/95] % [IP23700(ALL)01/95] * [IP23800(ALL)08/95] The Interior and Exterior Lights Turning On the Exterior Lights To turn on your headlamps, parking lamps, side markers, and tail lamps, use the knob that is to the left of the steering wheel. [IP24200(ALL)08/95] one third page art:0000695-C The knob for the headlamps, parking lamps, and tail lamps [IP24500(ALL)08/95] To turn on the parking lamps, side markers, and tail lamps, turn the knob to “P” or the first position. [IP24600(ALL)08/95] To turn on the headlamps, parking lamps, side markers, and tail lamps, turn the knob to the second position. [IP25200(ALL)03/95] one third page art:0001411-B Turning on the high beams 106 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP25250(ALL)02/89] To change your headlamps from low to high beam, push the turn signal lever away from you. To change them back to low beam, pull the lever toward you. *[IP25300(ALL)03/93] For more information about how the high beam headlamps work, see Steering column controls in the Index. % Daytime Running Light System [IP25610(ALL)03/95] (Canadian and fleet vehicles only) *[IP25615(ALL)03/95] The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system is designed to turn the high beam headlamps on, with a reduced light output and without illuminating the high beam indicator lamp in the instrument panel. The DRL system operates when all of the following conditions are met: *[IP25620(ALL)03/95] *[IP25625(ALL)01/95] ❑ The vehicle is “running.” ❑ The vehicle has a fully released parking *[IP25630(ALL)03/95] *[IP25635(ALL)01/95] ❑ The headlamp system is in the OFF position. *[IP25605(ALL)01/95] brake. NOTE: If you have a vehicle with an automatic lighting system, the DRL system is active until the automatic system turns on the headlamps. *[IP25636(ALL)10/94] NOTE: The high beam indicator will not turn on in the flash-to-pass mode during nighttime driving. [IP25637(ALL)01/95] You may notice that the lights flicker when the vehicle is turned on or off. This is a normal condition. 107 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 *[IP25638(ALL)01/95] RWARNING When the Daytime Running Light (DRL) system is active the tail lamps, parking lamps and side markers on your vehicle will not be illuminated. It is necessary to turn on your headlamps at dusk. Failure to do so may result in a collision, possibly injuring yourself and others. *[IP25640(ALL)04/95] *[IP25650(ALL)04/95] % Cleaning the Exterior Lamps Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners to clean the lamps, as these may cause scratches or crack the lamps. % Setting the Autolamp Delay System (If equipped) *[IP26700(ALL)02/95] The autolamp sets the headlamps to turn on and off automatically. You can use the autolamp to: *[IP26800(ALL)01/95] *[IP26900(ALL)01/95] ❑ turn on the lamps automatically at night ❑ turn off the lamps automatically during [IP27000(ALL)11/94] ❑ keep the lamps on for up to three minutes *[IP26600(ALL)02/95] daylight after you turn the ignition to the OFF position. 108 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP27100(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0000693-C The autolamp system on the left side of the instrument panel *[IP27400(ALL)01/95] *[IP27450(ALL)08/95] To set the autolamp: 1. Make sure the headlamp knob is in the OFF position. If the switch for the headlamps is ON, you cancel the autolamp. *[IP27550(ALL)01/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to ON or start your vehicle. *[IP27650(ALL)01/95] 3. Find the autolamp thumbwheel to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. [IP27750(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the autolamp thumbwheel past the stop to the beginning of the MAX position. The indicator light will come on. *[IP27850(ALL)01/95] 5. The autolamp automatically turns the lamps on and off for you. [IP27950(ALL)08/95] Do not put any articles on top of the photocell that is located in the top right corner of the instrument panel. This photocell controls the autolamp. If you cover it, the photocell reacts as if it is nighttime, and the lamps turn on. *[IP28050(ALL)01/95] To turn the autolamp off, move the thumbwheel back to OFF. 109 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 *[IP28500(ALL)01/95] You can set the autolamp so the headlamps stay on for up to three minutes after you turn your vehicle off. *[IP28600(ALL)01/95] To keep the lamps on after you leave your vehicle: *[IP28650(ALL)01/95] ❑ Turn the thumbwheel as far into the MAX *[IP28750(ALL)01/95] ❑ The further you move the thumbwheel into range as you want. the DELAY area (toward the MAX position), the longer the lamps will stay on after you leave your vehicle. Similarly, if you move the thumbwheel only slightly into the DELAY area, your lamps will stay on only for a moment after you turn your vehicle off. % Lighting Up the Interior and Instrument Panel *[IP30000(ALL)08/95] With the light knob in the parking lamps or the headlamps position, you can brighten or dim the lights in the instrument panel. To do this, use the thumbwheel to the left of the steering wheel. This wheel also turns on the interior lights with the light switch on or off. *[IP29800(ALL)01/95] [IP30300(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0000692-C The thumbwheel that controls the light on the instrument panel 110 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP30700(ALL)11/94] To dim the instrument panel lights, rotate the thumbwheel down. To turn on the interior lights, turn the thumbwheel all the way up. The interior lights also come on when any side door or the liftgate is opened. [IP30925(ALL)03/95] Dome Lamps [IP30950(ALL)03/95] The front dome lamp is located overhead between the driver and front passenger seats. However, if your vehicle is equipped with a power moon roof, the dome lamp is located behind the moon roof. [IP30975(ALL)11/94] In the wagon, the rear dome lamp is located overhead near the rear seating positions. [IP31025(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0001410-A The dome/map lamp [IP31050(ALL)03/95] Turn the map lamps on and off with the switches on the lamp. The dome lamp illuminates when any door is opened. If either the driver’s or passenger’s front door is opened using the outside door handle, the light will remain on for 25 seconds after the door has been shut. If any other door is opened or if either of the front doors is opened using the inside handle, the lamp will immediately turn off when the door is closed. 111 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP31075(ALL)11/94] quarter page art:0001377-A The dome lamp [IP31100(ALL)03/95] The dome lamp will stay illuminated if the switch is pushed to the ON position. The dome lamp will stay off if the switch is pushed to the OFF position. When the switch is positioned to the door/middle position, the dome lamp will come on when either of the front doors or the liftgate (wagon) is opened. [IP31125(ALL)03/95] The rear dome lamp also illuminates when the liftgate is opened and goes off when it is closed. [IP31150(ALL)11/94] one third page art:0001378-A The map lamps on the moon roof console [IP31175(ALL)11/94] Turn each map lamp on the moon roof console on and off with the switch near that lamp. 112 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP31200(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Interior Lamps *[IP31300(ALL)04/95] Your interior dome lamps and map lamps are plastic and should be cleaned with a mild detergent diluted in water. Rinse them with clear water. % Battery Saver [IP31500(ALL)11/94] When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle will turn off battery voltage to the interior lights after 40 minutes. *[IP31600(ALL)02/95] This will prevent draining of the battery if those lights have been left on inadvertently or if a door is not completely closed. Battery voltage to these lamps will be restored when the outside front door handles are lifted, the keyless entry keypad is used, the remote entry transmitter is used, any door is opened, the trunk is opened, or the ignition key is turned to the ON position. *[IP31400(ALL)01/95] 113 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP32600(ALL)02/95] Clock [IP33200(ALL)03/95] quarter page art:0000247-G The digital clock *[IP33750(ALL)01/95] 1. To set the hour, press and hold the hour button. When the desired hour appears, release the button. *[IP33850(ALL)01/95] 2. To set the minutes, press and hold the minute button. When the desired minute appears, release the button. 114 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 Warning Lights and Gauges % In your vehicle, the warning lights and gauges are grouped together on the instrument panel. We call this grouping a cluster. Your vehicle has one of the following clusters: [LG00800(ALL)02/95] ❑ Standard cluster ❑ Optional cluster *[LG00500(ALL)05/92] [LG00900(ALL)02/95] *[LG01100(ALL)05/94] If you are not sure which cluster your vehicle has, check the diagrams on the following pages. [LG02050(ALL)03/95] The Standard Cluster [LG02075(ALL)02/95] The following warning lights and gauges are on the standard cluster. All of the warning lights and gauges alert you to possible problems with your vehicle. Some of the lights listed are optional. The following sections detail what each of these indicators means. 73 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 [LG02101(ALL)03/95] full page art:0000663-G The standard cluster 74 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 Indicator Lights and Chimes *[LG02400(ALL)01/95] % [LG02500(ALL)04/95] * *[LG02510(ALL)01/95] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime [LG02550(ALL)02/95] ❑ If the driver’s safety belt is not buckled when This warning light and chime remind you to fasten your safety belt. The following conditions will take place: the key is turned to the ON position, the light will activate for 1 minute and the chime will sound for 4 to 8 seconds. *[LG02600(ALL)03/95] ❑ If the driver’s safety belt is buckled while the [LG02650(ALL)02/95] ❑ If the driver’s safety belt is buckled before the light is on or the chime is sounding, both the light and the chime will turn off. key is turned to the ON position, the light will turn on for a short period, but the chime will not activate. [LG02700(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0000107-B Safety belt warning light *[LG02900(ALL)03/95] *[LG03000(ALL)03/95] % Brake System Warning Light The warning light for the brakes can show two things — that the parking brake is not fully released, or that the brake fluid level is low in the master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level is low, the brake system should be checked by your dealer or a qualified service technician. 75 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 [LG03300(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0000108-D Brake system warning light *[LG03500(ALL)01/95] This light comes on when the parking brake is set, or if it is not set, it comes on briefly when you turn the ignition to the START position. It normally goes off shortly after the engine starts and you release the parking brake. If the light stays on after you have fully released the parking brake, have the hydraulic brake system serviced by your dealer or a qualified service technician. *[LG03700(ALL)01/95] RWARNING The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes may not be working properly. Have the brakes checked immediately. Brake failure may result in serious personal injury or vehicle damage. *[LG03800(ALL)01/95] *[LG03900(ALL)03/95] % Charging System Light This light, shown as a battery symbol on your cluster, indicates that your battery is not being charged and that you need to have the electrical system checked. 76 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 [LG04000(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0000278-B Charging system light [LG04300(ALL)11/94] This light comes on every time you turn your ignition key to the ON or START position. The light should go off when the engine starts and the alternator begins to charge. *[LG04400(ALL)01/95] If the light stays on or comes on when the engine is running, have the electrical system checked as soon as possible. % Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light [LG04900(ALL)02/95] This light indicates the engine’s oil pressure, not the oil level. However, if the engine’s oil level is low, it could affect the oil pressure. The light should come on every time the ignition key is turned to the ON or START position, and should turn off after the engine is running. *[LG04800(ALL)02/95] [LG04950(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0001025-B Engine oil pressure warning light [LG05100(ALL)11/94] If the light stays on or turns on when the engine is running, the engine has lost oil pressure and continued operation will cause severe engine damage. 77 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 *[LG05105(ALL)03/95] *[LG05200(ALL)03/95] *[LG05300(ALL)11/94] If you lose engine oil pressure: 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible. 2. Shut off the engine immediately. If you do not stop the engine as soon as safely possible, severe engine damage could result. *[LG05400(ALL)11/94] 3. Check the engine’s oil level, following the instructions on checking and adding engine oil in this Owner Guide. (See Engine oil in the Index.) If you do not follow these instructions, you or others could be injured. To ensure an accurate reading, your vehicle should be on level ground. [LG05500(ALL)11/94] 4. If the level is low, add only as much oil as necessary to bring it to the full level before you start the engine again. Do not overfill. Do not operate the engine if the light is on, regardless of the oil level. Contact your nearest dealer for further service actions. *[LG06200(ALL)01/95] *[LG06300(ALL)03/95] High Beam Light [LG06350(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle is equipped with Daylight Running Lamps (DRL), the high beam light will not come on when you flash the lights. % This light comes on when the headlamps are turned to high beam or when you flash the lights. [LG06400(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0000111-B High beam light 78 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 [LG06500(ALL)03/95] Door Ajar Light and Chime [LG06800(ALL)03/95] This light comes on and a single chime sounds if one of the doors or the liftgate or liftgate window (wagon) is not completely shut and the ignition is in the ON position. [LG06850(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0000113-B Door ajar light *[LG07000(ALL)03/95] *[LG07100(ALL)03/95] Chime for Headlamps On [LG07200(ALL)03/95] A 3-second chime sounds after a 20-second delay if the ignition has been turned to the OFF position, the parking lamps or headlamps are on, and no door has been opened. *[LG07400(ALL)01/95] *[LG07620(ALL)03/95] Air Bag Readiness Light % % This chime sounds if the driver or passenger door is open when the parking lamps or headlamps are on. The chime sounds until you close the door, turn off the lamps or turn the ignition to the ON position. RWARNING A problem with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: the readiness light will either flash or stay lit, or it will not light, or a group of five beeps will be heard. 79 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 *[LG07640(ALL)04/95] RWARNING If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the air bag system serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. [LG07650(ALL)11/94] one inch art:0000653-C Air bag readiness light *[LG07700(ALL)11/94] *[LG07750(ALL)03/95] Service Engine Soon Warning Light *[LG07775(ALL)03/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle may cause incorrect operation of the OBD II system. Additions such as burglar alarms, cellular phones, and CB radios must be carefully installed. Do not install these devices by tapping into or running wires close to powertrain control system wires or components. % The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II) system consists of the hardware and software necessary to monitor the operation of the powertrain. The OBD II system is designed to check the function of the vehicle’s powertrain control system during normal operation. If an emission problem is detected, the Service Engine Soon light (in the cluster) is turned on. 80 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 [LG07800(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0000282-B Service engine soon light [LG07825(ALL)03/95] This light comes on when you turn the ignition key to ON, but should turn off when the engine starts. If the light does not come on when you turn the ignition to ON or if it comes on and stays on when you are driving, have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with one of the vehicle’s emission control systems. You do not need to have your vehicle towed in. [LG07851(ALL)04/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) second intervals while you are driving the vehicle, it means that the engine is misfiring. If this condition persists, damage could occur to the engine or catalytic converter. Avoid heavy acceleration and have your vehicle serviced at the first opportunity. You do not need to have your vehicle towed in. *[LG07875(ALL)03/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasions while you are driving, it means that a malfunction occurred and the condition corrected itself. [LG07900(ALL)03/95] An example of a condition which corrects itself occurs when an engine running out of fuel begins to misfire. In this case, the Service Engine Soon Warning Light may turn on and will then set a Diagnostic Trouble Code indicating that the engine was misfiring while the last of the fuel was being consumed. After refueling, the Service Engine Soon Warning Light will turn off after the vehicle has completed three consecutive 81 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 warm up cycles without a misfire condition occurring. A warm up cycle consists of engine start from a cold condition (engine at ambient temperature) and running until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. [LG07925(ALL)03/95] On the fourth engine start up, the Service Engine Soon Warning Light will turn off as soon as the engine begins to crank. It is not necessary to have the engine serviced. [LG07951(ALL)11/94] Under certain conditions, the Service Engine Soon light may come on if the fuel cap is not properly installed. If the Service Engine Soon light comes on and you suspect that the fuel cap is not properly installed, pull off the road as soon as it is safely possible and turn off the engine. Remove and replace the fuel cap, making sure it is properly seated. [LG08001(ALL)02/95] After completing the three consecutive warm up cycles and on the fourth engine start up, the Service Engine Soon warning light should turn off. If the light does not go off after the fourth engine restart, have your vehicle serviced by your dealer or a qualified technician. % Turn Signal Indicator Lights [LG08102(ALL)04/95] The turn signal arrow will flash to indicate the direction in which you are going to be turning. *[LG08051(ALL)04/95] [LG08150(ALL)04/95] one inch art:0010525-A 82 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 [LG08251(ALL)11/94] Speed Control Indicator Light (If equipped) [LG08301(ALL)02/95] This light comes on when the speed control ON switch is pressed. It turns off when the speed control OFF switch is pressed or when the ignition is turned to the OFF position. [LG08351(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0001376-A Speed control indicator light % Anti-lock Brake System Warning Light (If equipped) *[LG08392(ALL)01/95] This light comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to the START position. It should go off shortly after the engine starts. If it stays on longer than five (5) seconds, it indicates that your anti-lock brake system may not be working properly. Normal braking is not affected unless the BRAKE system warning light also remains on for longer than six (6) seconds. You should have your vehicle serviced immediately by your dealer or qualified service technician to restore the benefits of the anti-lock feature. See Anti-lock brakes in the Index for more information. *[LG08391(ALL)02/95] [LG08394(ALL)03/95] one inch art:0000674-D Anti-lock brake system warning light 83 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 *[LG08396(ALL)10/93] % [LG08400(ALL)01/95] * Gauges Fuel Gauge [LG08425(ALL)11/94] The fuel gauge displays approximately how much fuel is in the fuel tank only when the ignition is in the ON position. [LG08525(ALL)11/94] For proper fuel gauge indication after adding fuel, the ignition should be in the OFF position while the vehicle is being refueled. *[LG08625(ALL)06/93] The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion. [LG08725(ALL)11/94] With the ignition in the OFF position, the fuel gauge indicator may drift from the ignition ON indication. *[LG08800(ALL)01/95] *[LG08900(ALL)03/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge *[LG09000(ALL)02/95] The pointer moves from the C (cold) mark into the Normal band as the engine coolant warms up. It is acceptable for the pointer to fluctuate within the Normal band under normal driving conditions. Under certain driving conditions, such as heavy stop and go traffic or driving up hills in hot weather, the pointer may indicate at the top of the Normal band. % This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant, not the coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level or mixture, the gauge indication will not be accurate. 84 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 [LG09005(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0001095-B Engine coolant temperature gauge *[LG09100(ALL)02/95] If, under any circumstances, the pointer moves above the Normal band, the engine coolant is overheating and continued operation may cause engine damage. *[LG09150(ALL)01/95] *[LG09200(ALL)03/95] *[LG09300(ALL)01/95] *[LG09400(ALL)11/94] *[LG09410(ALL)04/95] If your engine coolant overheats: [LG09415(ALL)11/94] If the coolant continues to overheat, have the cooling system serviced. *[LG09800(ALL)01/95] *[LG09900(ALL)01/95] Speedometer *[LG10000(ALL)01/95] *[LG10100(ALL)01/95] Odometer % % 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible. 2. Turn off the engine. 3. Let the engine cool. 4. Check the coolant level following the instructions on checking and adding coolant to your engine, see Engine Coolant in the Index. If you do not follow these instructions, you or others could be injured. The speedometer tells you how many miles (kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving. The odometer tells you the total number of miles (kilometers) your vehicle has been driven. 85 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 *[LG10200(ALL)11/94] *[LG10300(ALL)11/94] % Trip Odometer The trip odometer tells you how many miles (kilometers) your vehicle has been driven since the last reset. Press the reset button to return the trip odometer to zero. % Tachometer [LG10340(ALL)02/95] The tachometer tells you the approximate engine revolutions per minute (how fast the engine is running). You may damage the engine if you drive with the indicator in the red zone. [LG10350(ALL)02/95] The Optional Cluster [LG10380(ALL)02/95] The optional cluster has indicator lights that are not on the standard cluster. For details about these lights, read the information below. To learn about the standard warning lights and gauges that come on all clusters, see The Standard Cluster earlier in this chapter. *[LG10320(ALL)02/95] 86 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 [LG10401(ALL)03/95] full page art:0000644-H The optional cluster 87 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 [LG14750(ALL)03/95] Low Coolant Light and Chime (If equipped) [LG14850(ALL)04/95] This light indicates that the level of the engine coolant is low inside the coolant reservoir. [LG14950(ALL)04/95] one inch art:0000114-C Low coolant light [LG15000(ALL)03/95] This light comes on for a few seconds when your ignition key is turned to the ON position, but should turn off when the engine starts. If the coolant is low, the light will come on and a single chime will sound. If this light stays on, check the level of coolant inside the recovery bottle. For instructions on adding coolant mixture, see Engine coolant in the Index. [LG15150(ALL)03/95] Low Washer Fluid Light (If equipped) *[LG15250(ALL)02/95] This light comes on if the reservoir is less than a quarter full when you turn on the windshield washers. [LG15350(ALL)04/95] one inch art:0000118-B Low washer fluid light 88 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 [LG15800(ALL)04/95] Low Fuel Light (If equipped) [LG15900(ALL)03/95] This light comes on when your fuel gauge indicates approximately 1/16 of a tank. The ignition must be turned to the ON position for this light to come on. This light will glow steadily. [LG16000(ALL)04/95] one inch art:0000116-C Low fuel light [LG16100(ALL)02/95] Rear Lamp Out Indicator (If equipped) [LG16200(ALL)02/95] This light indicates that a rear tail lamp or brakelamp is not functioning. It comes on momentarily when the ignition is turned to the START position, then goes out. This light will come on to show a rear tail lamp burnout when the light switch is turned to the parking lamp or headlamp position. This light will come on to show a brakelamp burnout only when the brake pedal is pressed. The light will stay on until the ignition is turned to the OFF position. [LG16220(ALL)02/95] [LG16260(ALL)04/95] [LG16280(ALL)02/95] [LG16300(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0000117-B Rear lamp out light [LG16400(ALL)12/91] NOTE: The warning light may not work or you may get a false reading if you use trailer lights or use improper replacement bulbs. 89 File:fclgs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:08:13 1995 % Anti-Theft Alarm Light (If equipped) [LG16800(ALL)11/94] This light is used when you set the anti-theft alarm system. See Anti-theft system in the Index. *[LG16700(ALL)04/95] [LG16825(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0001389-A Anti-theft alarm light % Overdrive Off Indicator (If equipped) [LG16975(ALL)02/95] This light tells you that the Overdrive Off (O/D OFF) switch on the gearshift lever has been pushed. When the light is on, the transaxle will not shift into overdrive. Depressing the O/D OFF switch located below the gearshift release button on the floor gearshift or located on the end of the column gearshift will return the vehicle to “overdrive on” mode. The transaxle will be in the “overdrive on” mode when the vehicle is started even if the “O/D OFF” mode was selected when the vehicle was last shut off. [LG17025(ALL)02/95] If the light does not come on when the O/D OFF switch is depressed or if the light flashes when you are driving, have your vehicle serviced at the first opportunity. If this condition persists, damage could occur to the transaxle. *[LG16950(ALL)10/94] [LG17050(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0001009-B Overdrive off indicator 90 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 Instrument Panel Controls % The main controls for the climate control system, clock, and radio are in the oval Integrated Control Panel on the instrument panel. [IP00410(ALL)04/95] The controls for the lights and climate control air registers are also on the instrument panel. *[IP00420(ALL)03/95] Clean the instrument panel lens and woodtone trim with a soft cloth and a glass cleaner. Do not use paper towel or any abrasive cleaner to clean either the lens or the woodtone trim as these may cause scratches. *[IP00400(ALL)04/95] *[IP00430(ALL)04/95] % NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases the gloss (shine) of the upper part of the instrument panel should be avoided. The dull finish in this area is to help protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection. 91 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP00470(ALL)04/95] full page art:0000661-J Instrument panel 92 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 % *[IP00500(ALL)01/95] *[IP00600(ALL)01/94] [IP00900(ALL)02/95] [IP01000(ALL)04/95] The Climate Control Systems Your vehicle has one of the following climate control systems: ❑ Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System ❑ Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) System *[IP01100(ALL)09/89] If you are not sure which system your vehicle has, see the diagrams on the following pages. [IP03150(ALL)11/94] Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System [IP03175(ALL)03/95] one third page art:0000698-E The knobs that control the manual heating and air conditioning system [IP03200(ALL)03/95] Fan speed knob [IP03250(ALL)03/95] The fan speed knob controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. There are four fan speeds: LO, medium/low (first dot), medium/high (second dot), and HI. 93 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP03300(ALL)03/95] Function selector knob [IP03351(ALL)04/95] The function selector knob controls airflow to the inside of the vehicle. [IP03401(ALL)03/95] MAX A/C [IP03450(ALL)03/95] MAX A/C uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. It allows for faster cooling but is noisier than A/C. The airflow will be from the instrument panel registers. [IP03501(ALL)03/95] A/C [IP03550(ALL)04/95] A/C uses outside air to cool the vehicle. It is quieter that MAX A/C, but not as economical. The airflow will be from the instrument panel registers. [IP03601(ALL)03/95] VENT [IP03650(ALL)03/95] VENT brings in outside air through the instrument panel registers. It can be used for heating or ventilating. [IP03701(ALL)03/95] OFF [IP03750(ALL)03/95] In OFF, outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. [IP03801(ALL)04/95] [IP03850(ALL)04/95] [IP03901(ALL)04/95] [IP03950(ALL)04/95] S (Panel and floor) This brings in outside air through the instrument panel registers and the front and rear floor ducts. It can be used for heating or ventilating. R (Floor) This allows for maximum heating. The airflow is from the front and rear floor ducts. 94 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP04001(ALL)04/95] [IP04050(ALL)04/95] [IP04100(ALL)04/95] P (Floor and defrost) This brings in outside air through the floor ducts and the windshield defroster ducts. It can be used for heating or ventilation. V (Defrost) [IP04150(ALL)04/95] This brings in outside air through the windshield defroster ducts. It can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield. [IP04200(ALL)03/95] Temperature control knob [IP04250(ALL)03/95] The temperature control knob may be adjusted from cool (blue range) to warm (red range). % Electronic Automatic Temperature Control System *[IP04725(ALL)02/95] The control for your Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) is located at the center of the instrument panel in the Integrated Control Panel and will operate only when the ignition is turned on to the ON position. *[IP04825(ALL)02/95] The EATC feature will maintain the temperature you select and automatically control the airflow for your comfort. It also allows you to override the automatic operation with manual override buttons. *[IP04700(ALL)04/95] 95 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP04925(ALL)03/95] full page art:0001285-D The Electronic Automatic Temperature Control System 96 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP05025(ALL)03/95] To turn your EATC on, press the AUTO button or any of the six manual override buttons along the bottom of the control. [IP05125(ALL)03/95] To turn your EATC off, press the OFF button. When the system is off, the Display window will be blank (dark). If you select AUTO, the system will automatically determine fan speed and airflow location. If a manual override button is selected, your selection determines airflow location only. Fan speed remains automatic unless you override it by pressing either side of the FAN speed button located at the extreme left of the control panel. To change the temperature, select any temperature between 65˚F (18˚C) and 85˚F (29˚C) by pressing the a or b side of the TEMP button. The EATC will display the selected temperature. To change the temperature display from Farenheit to Celsius, depress the MAX A/C and V F-DEF at the same time and hold them down for about a second. To change back to the original setting, repeat the process. If the battery is disconnected, the display will revert to Fahrenheit and must be reset to Celsius. [IP05225(ALL)02/95] [IP05325(ALL)03/95] [IP05400(ALL)04/95] [IP05425(ALL)03/95] If you want continuous maximum cooling, press the b side of the TEMP button until 60˚F (16˚C) is shown in the display window. Your EATC will cool at maximum and disregard the 60˚F (16˚C) setting until you select a warmer temperature with the a side of the TEMP button. If you want continuous maximum heating, press the a side of the TEMP button until 90˚F (32˚C) is shown in the display window. Your EATC will provide maximum heat regardless of the 90˚F (32˚C) setting until you select a cooler temperature with the b side of the TEMP button. 97 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP05525(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0001286-D The display window [IP05625(ALL)02/95] The display window will indicate the selected temperature and the operating function you have chosen: AUTO or one of the six manual overrides. It will also indicate manual control of the fan speed with the word FAN, H, and dots. The display window with all possible displays and their positions are shown here. Normally not all are shown at the same time but are included here to familiarize you with the names and symbols. *[IP05725(ALL)01/95] Automatic operation [IP05825(ALL)03/95] Press the AUTO button and select the desired temperature. The selected temperature and AUTO will be shown in the Display window. The EATC will automatically heat or cool to achieve the set temperature. Under normal conditions, your EATC will need no additional attention. [IP05925(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0001287-B The AUTO temperature display 98 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP06025(ALL)03/95] When in AUTO and weather conditions require heat, air will be sent to the floor. But a feature is included in your EATC to prevent blowing cold air to the floor if the engine coolant is not warm enough to allow heating. The EATC will direct the airflow to the windshield at low fan speed. In 3-1/2 minutes or less, the fan speed will start to increase and the airflow will change to the floor area. [IP06100(ALL)03/95] When in AUTO and weather conditions require cooling, the EATC will use outside air or recirculated air, depending on the temperature that is selected. [IP06125(ALL)04/95] If unusual conditions exist (i.e., window fogging, etc.), the six manual override buttons allow you to select special air discharge locations. The fan speed button allows you to adjust the fan speed to suit your needs. *[IP06225(ALL)03/95] Temperature selection [IP06325(ALL)04/95] The TEMP button at the upper left of the Control is for temperature selection. The a side of the TEMP button will increase the set temperature and the b side of the TEMP button will lower the set temperature. Pressing the button and releasing it will change the set temperature one degree. Holding either side of the button in will rapidly change the temperature setting in one degree increments to either 65˚F (18˚C) or 85˚F (29˚C). Then, the set temperature will jump 5˚F (3˚C) and stop at either 60˚F (16˚C) which is maximum cooling or 90˚F (32˚C) which is maximum heating. [IP06525(ALL)02/95] The average temperature range used is between 68˚F (20˚C) and 78˚F (26˚C). Changing the temperature setting by several degrees outside this range or overriding to 60˚ or 90˚F (16˚ or 32˚C) as described above will not speed up the heating or cooling process. 99 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP06625(ALL)11/94] Fan speed button [IP06725(ALL)04/95] Your EATC automatically adjusts the fan speed to the existing conditions. You must press AUTO for automatic fan speed operation. To control the fan speed yourself, use the button which will cancel the automatic fan speed control. The button is located at the left side of the EATC control panel. It is marked H. Press the (-) side for lower speeds. Press the (+) side for higher speeds. [IP06925(ALL)03/95] When you press the fan speed button, the fan speed will go to manual control. The display window will show the word FAN, H and a series of dots along with the selected temperature and operating function. [IP07025(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0001290-B The fan display [IP07125(ALL)03/95] You can override the fan speed at any time. If you use the button to control the fan speed, the EATC will continue to control the temperature but you control the fan speed. To return to auto fan control, press the AUTO button. If you are operating in one of the override functions (S, MAX A/C, etc.), automatic fan control will continue unless you press the fan speed button. To return to automatic fan control, press the AUTO button. The EATC will return to automatic operation. If you want to return to any override function, press the button for that function. The fan speed will continue to be automatically controlled. 100 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 *[IP07225(ALL)01/95] Manual override buttons [IP07325(ALL)04/95] Your EATC has six buttons which allow you to make special selections. The buttons are located along the bottom edge of the EATC and allow you to determine where the air will be discharged. Pressing any override button changes the air discharge location only. It does not affect the ability of the system to control temperature or the fan speed. Return to fully automatic operation by pushing the AUTO button. *[IP07425(ALL)01/95] MAX A/C button [IP07525(ALL)04/95] The MAX A/C feature allows for faster cooling because air is drawn from inside the vehicle. Using inside air causes the fan to sound louder which is normal for this selection. The display window will change to indicate MAX A/C and the airflow will be from the instrument panel registers. To exit, push AUTO or any of the other five manual override buttons. % VENT button [IP07725(ALL)03/95] Press this button to select outside air through the instrument panel registers. The display window will show the set temperature and VENT to the lower right of the temperature. Your EATC will heat the air if the temperature you have selected is warmer than the outside air coming into the vehicle. However, the air will NOT be cooled regardless of the temperature setting. Airflow will be from the instrument panel registers. *[IP07625(ALL)01/95] 101 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP07825(ALL)04/95] [IP07925(ALL)02/95] [IP08025(ALL)04/95] [IP08125(ALL)03/95] [IP08225(ALL)04/95] [IP08325(ALL)02/95] [IP08425(ALL)04/95] [IP08525(ALL)02/95] S (Panel and floor) button Push this button to get air from the floor and instrument panel registers at the same time. The display will show the set temperature and S. Depending on the selected temperature, the air will be automatically heated or cooled. R (Floor) Airflow will be to the floor when the R (floor) button is pressed. The display window will show the set temperature and R (floor) to the right of the temperature. Fan speed will be automatic unless manually controlled. If you override the fan speed and wish to return to automatic fan control, press AUTO. Then, again select R (floor) for airflow to the floor. P (Floor and defrost) Press this button to get air to the floor and windshield defrosters at the same time. The display will show the set temperature and P. If the outside temperature is about 50˚F (10˚C) and above, the air will be dehumidified to remove moisture. This will help to prevent fogging in humid weather. V F-DEF (Front defrost) Press the V F-DEF (front defrost) button to obtain maximum airflow to the windshield. Adjust the temperature setting as required for defrosting. The Display window will show the temperature setting with V to the right of the temperature. When the outside temperature is about 50˚F (10˚C) and above, the air will be dehumidified to remove moisture. This will help prevent fogging in humid weather. 102 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP08625(ALL)04/95] OUTSIDE TEMP button [IP08725(ALL)03/95] When this button is pressed, the temperature of the air outside of the vehicle will show in the display window. If the EATC is off, the display will go blank after 4 seconds. If the EATC is on, the outside temperature will be shown until the OUTSIDE Temp button is pressed a second time or another override button is pressed. *[IP08825(ALL)01/95] NOTE: The outside temperature reading is most accurate when the vehicle is moving. Higher readings may be obtained when the vehicle is not moving. The readings that you get may not agree with temperatures given on the radio due to differences in vehicle and station locations. *[IP08850(ALL)04/95] *[IP08875(ALL)04/95] Service [IP08925(ALL)04/95] Operating tips [IP09025(ALL)04/95] The following tips will help you to get the most satisfaction from your climate control system. [IP09125(ALL)04/95] If your EATC is not operating as described here, take it to your dealer to have it checked. System diagnostics are built in which will allow your dealer to readily identify problems that might occur. ❑ In humid weather, select V F-DEF (front defrost) before driving. This will help to prevent windshield fogging. After a few minutes of operation, switch to any desired selection. 103 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 *[IP09325(ALL)03/95] ❑ Do not put objects under the front seats that [IP09425(ALL)04/95] ❑ Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the air interfere with the flow of air to the back seat area. intake area of your climate control system which could block the air intake. The intake area is located at the bottom of the windshield, under the hood at the passenger side rear corner. [IP09500(ALL)03/95] ❑ If the air conditioner performs well in MAX A/C but not in A/C, this may indicate that the MicronAirH filter (if equipped) needs to be replaced. [IP10000(ALL)03/95] MicronAirH Air Filter (If equipped) *[IP10100(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle may have an air filter that removes pollen and road dust from outside air before it is directed to the interior of the vehicle. For maintenance of this filter, see Servicing Your Sable. [IP21650(ALL)04/95] Rear Window Defroster and Heated Side View Mirrors [IP21700(ALL)04/95] The defroster for the rear window clears frost, fog, or thin ice from both the inside and outside of the rear window and activates the heated side view mirrors. [IP21900(ALL)04/95] The button for the rear defroster and heated side view mirrors is on the instrument panel. [IP22200(ALL)04/95] one inch art:0000651-E The button that controls the rear window defroster and heated side view mirrors 104 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP22300(ALL)04/95] Clear away any snow that is on the rear window and side view mirrors before using the defroster. With the engine running, push the defrost button. After 10 minutes, the defroster will turn off. If the window and mirrors are still not clear, push the defroster button again. The defroster will turn off when the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. % NOTE: Never use sharp instruments or window cleaners with abrasives to clean the inside of your rear window. If you do, you may damage the heating elements that are bonded to the inside of the rear window and cause damage to the rear window defroster. [IP23200(ALL)04/95] Liftgate Window Wiper and Washer (If equipped) *[IP23000(ALL)03/94] [IP23401(ALL)04/95] quarter page art:0000696-E The liftgate window wiper and washer switches [IP23500(ALL)04/95] To turn on the liftgate window wiper, press the b switch. To turn the liftgate window wiper off, press the switch again. [IP23550(ALL)04/95] To turn on the liftgate window washer, press the d switch. When the d switch is pressed, it also turns on the liftgate wiper. 105 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 % *[IP23600(ALL)01/95] % [IP23700(ALL)01/95] * [IP23800(ALL)08/95] The Interior and Exterior Lights Turning On the Exterior Lights To turn on your headlamps, parking lamps, side markers, and tail lamps, use the knob that is to the left of the steering wheel. [IP24200(ALL)08/95] one third page art:0000695-C The knob for the headlamps, parking lamps, and tail lamps [IP24500(ALL)08/95] To turn on the parking lamps, side markers, and tail lamps, turn the knob to “P” or the first position. [IP24600(ALL)08/95] To turn on the headlamps, parking lamps, side markers, and tail lamps, turn the knob to the second position. [IP25200(ALL)03/95] one third page art:0001411-B Turning on the high beams 106 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP25250(ALL)02/89] To change your headlamps from low to high beam, push the turn signal lever away from you. To change them back to low beam, pull the lever toward you. *[IP25300(ALL)03/93] For more information about how the high beam headlamps work, see Steering column controls in the Index. % Daytime Running Light System [IP25610(ALL)03/95] (Canadian and fleet vehicles only) *[IP25615(ALL)03/95] The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system is designed to turn the high beam headlamps on, with a reduced light output and without illuminating the high beam indicator lamp in the instrument panel. The DRL system operates when all of the following conditions are met: *[IP25620(ALL)03/95] *[IP25625(ALL)01/95] ❑ The vehicle is “running.” ❑ The vehicle has a fully released parking *[IP25630(ALL)03/95] *[IP25635(ALL)01/95] ❑ The headlamp system is in the OFF position. *[IP25605(ALL)01/95] brake. NOTE: If you have a vehicle with an automatic lighting system, the DRL system is active until the automatic system turns on the headlamps. *[IP25636(ALL)10/94] NOTE: The high beam indicator will not turn on in the flash-to-pass mode during nighttime driving. [IP25637(ALL)01/95] You may notice that the lights flicker when the vehicle is turned on or off. This is a normal condition. 107 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 *[IP25638(ALL)01/95] RWARNING When the Daytime Running Light (DRL) system is active the tail lamps, parking lamps and side markers on your vehicle will not be illuminated. It is necessary to turn on your headlamps at dusk. Failure to do so may result in a collision, possibly injuring yourself and others. *[IP25640(ALL)04/95] *[IP25650(ALL)04/95] % Cleaning the Exterior Lamps Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners to clean the lamps, as these may cause scratches or crack the lamps. % Setting the Autolamp Delay System (If equipped) *[IP26700(ALL)02/95] The autolamp sets the headlamps to turn on and off automatically. You can use the autolamp to: *[IP26800(ALL)01/95] *[IP26900(ALL)01/95] ❑ turn on the lamps automatically at night ❑ turn off the lamps automatically during [IP27000(ALL)11/94] ❑ keep the lamps on for up to three minutes *[IP26600(ALL)02/95] daylight after you turn the ignition to the OFF position. 108 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP27100(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0000693-C The autolamp system on the left side of the instrument panel *[IP27400(ALL)01/95] *[IP27450(ALL)08/95] To set the autolamp: 1. Make sure the headlamp knob is in the OFF position. If the switch for the headlamps is ON, you cancel the autolamp. *[IP27550(ALL)01/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to ON or start your vehicle. *[IP27650(ALL)01/95] 3. Find the autolamp thumbwheel to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. [IP27750(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the autolamp thumbwheel past the stop to the beginning of the MAX position. The indicator light will come on. *[IP27850(ALL)01/95] 5. The autolamp automatically turns the lamps on and off for you. [IP27950(ALL)08/95] Do not put any articles on top of the photocell that is located in the top right corner of the instrument panel. This photocell controls the autolamp. If you cover it, the photocell reacts as if it is nighttime, and the lamps turn on. *[IP28050(ALL)01/95] To turn the autolamp off, move the thumbwheel back to OFF. 109 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 *[IP28500(ALL)01/95] You can set the autolamp so the headlamps stay on for up to three minutes after you turn your vehicle off. *[IP28600(ALL)01/95] To keep the lamps on after you leave your vehicle: *[IP28650(ALL)01/95] ❑ Turn the thumbwheel as far into the MAX *[IP28750(ALL)01/95] ❑ The further you move the thumbwheel into range as you want. the DELAY area (toward the MAX position), the longer the lamps will stay on after you leave your vehicle. Similarly, if you move the thumbwheel only slightly into the DELAY area, your lamps will stay on only for a moment after you turn your vehicle off. % Lighting Up the Interior and Instrument Panel *[IP30000(ALL)08/95] With the light knob in the parking lamps or the headlamps position, you can brighten or dim the lights in the instrument panel. To do this, use the thumbwheel to the left of the steering wheel. This wheel also turns on the interior lights with the light switch on or off. *[IP29800(ALL)01/95] [IP30300(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0000692-C The thumbwheel that controls the light on the instrument panel 110 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP30700(ALL)11/94] To dim the instrument panel lights, rotate the thumbwheel down. To turn on the interior lights, turn the thumbwheel all the way up. The interior lights also come on when any side door or the liftgate is opened. [IP30925(ALL)03/95] Dome Lamps [IP30950(ALL)03/95] The front dome lamp is located overhead between the driver and front passenger seats. However, if your vehicle is equipped with a power moon roof, the dome lamp is located behind the moon roof. [IP30975(ALL)11/94] In the wagon, the rear dome lamp is located overhead near the rear seating positions. [IP31025(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0001410-A The dome/map lamp [IP31050(ALL)03/95] Turn the map lamps on and off with the switches on the lamp. The dome lamp illuminates when any door is opened. If either the driver’s or passenger’s front door is opened using the outside door handle, the light will remain on for 25 seconds after the door has been shut. If any other door is opened or if either of the front doors is opened using the inside handle, the lamp will immediately turn off when the door is closed. 111 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP31075(ALL)11/94] quarter page art:0001377-A The dome lamp [IP31100(ALL)03/95] The dome lamp will stay illuminated if the switch is pushed to the ON position. The dome lamp will stay off if the switch is pushed to the OFF position. When the switch is positioned to the door/middle position, the dome lamp will come on when either of the front doors or the liftgate (wagon) is opened. [IP31125(ALL)03/95] The rear dome lamp also illuminates when the liftgate is opened and goes off when it is closed. [IP31150(ALL)11/94] one third page art:0001378-A The map lamps on the moon roof console [IP31175(ALL)11/94] Turn each map lamp on the moon roof console on and off with the switch near that lamp. 112 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP31200(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Interior Lamps *[IP31300(ALL)04/95] Your interior dome lamps and map lamps are plastic and should be cleaned with a mild detergent diluted in water. Rinse them with clear water. % Battery Saver [IP31500(ALL)11/94] When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle will turn off battery voltage to the interior lights after 40 minutes. *[IP31600(ALL)02/95] This will prevent draining of the battery if those lights have been left on inadvertently or if a door is not completely closed. Battery voltage to these lamps will be restored when the outside front door handles are lifted, the keyless entry keypad is used, the remote entry transmitter is used, any door is opened, the trunk is opened, or the ignition key is turned to the ON position. *[IP31400(ALL)01/95] 113 File:fcips.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:32:19 1995 [IP32600(ALL)02/95] Clock [IP33200(ALL)03/95] quarter page art:0000247-G The digital clock *[IP33750(ALL)01/95] 1. To set the hour, press and hold the hour button. When the desired hour appears, release the button. *[IP33850(ALL)01/95] 2. To set the minutes, press and hold the minute button. When the desired minute appears, release the button. 114 File:fcscs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:05:58 1995 Steering Column Controls *[SC00400(ALL)01/95] The controls on the steering column and wheel are designed to give you easy access to the controls while you are driving. *[SC00500(ALL)01/95] *[SC00600(ALL)01/95] The Turn Signal Lever % [SC00700(ALL)03/95] *[SC00800(ALL)01/95] *[SC00900(ALL)01/95] *[SC01000(ALL)01/95] You can use the turn signal lever on the left side of the steering column to: ❑ operate the turn signals ❑ turn the high beams on/off ❑ flash the lights ❑ turn the windshield wipers and washer on/off *[SC01100(ALL)01/95] *[SC02201(ALL)03/95] Turn Signals *[SC02401(ALL)03/95] If the turn signal stays on after you turn, move the lever back to the center (off) position. *[SC02451(ALL)03/95] For lane changes, move the lever far enough to signal but not to latch. The lever will return to the off position when you release it. *[SC02800(ALL)03/95] *[SC03100(ALL)08/95] High Beams % % Move the lever up to signal a right turn. Move it down to signal a left turn. The corresponding indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash. To turn on the high beams, turn the headlamp control knob to the headlamp ON position and push the turn signal lever away from you until it latches. When the high beams are ON, the high beam indicator light on the instrument panel comes on. 115 File:fcscs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:05:58 1995 *[SC03200(ALL)03/95] To turn off the high beams, pull the lever toward you until it latches. The high beam indicator light turns off. *[SC03300(ALL)03/95] *[SC03400(ALL)08/95] Flashing the Lights % To flash the headlamps, pull the lever toward you for a moment and then release it. The headlamps will flash whether the headlamp knob is on or off. [SC03450(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0001411-B The turn signal lever % *[SC03500(ALL)03/95] *[SC03600(ALL)03/95] Windshield Wipers and Washer To turn on the windshield wipers, the ignition key must be turned to the ON or ACC position. [SC03900(ALL)05/94] Turn the knob on the end of the turn signal lever away from you to activate the wipers. The first seven detents are interval wipe positions, the eighth detent is the LO position, and the ninth detent is the HI position. *[SC04000(ALL)01/95] To turn the wipers off, turn the knob toward you to the OFF position. 116 File:fcscs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:05:58 1995 *[SC04100(ALL)03/95] *[SC04300(ALL)01/95] % Variable Interval Wipers In addition to two speed wipers, your vehicle has wipers that you can set to operate at varying intervals. For example, you can set the interval so they wipe less often when it drizzles or more often in heavier rain. [SC04500(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0001412-B The variable interval wiper on the turn signal lever *[SC04925(ALL)03/94] To set the interval wipers, turn the knob at the end of the turn signal lever toward or away from you until the wipers are going at the desired interval. *[SC04950(ALL)03/95] Windshield Washer [SC05000(ALL)05/94] To clean the windshield, push in the end of the wiper switch knob. For a constant spray, keep the knob pushed in. After you release the knob, the wipers operate for two to three cycles before turning off (if the wipers were off) or returning to HI, LO, or the interval setting selected. [SC05050(ALL)04/95] For information about the rear washer on the wagon, see Windshield washer fluid and wipers in the Index. *[SC05100(ALL)03/95] If the washer does not work, check the washer fluid level and fill it if it is low. See the Servicing Your Sable chapter. If there is enough fluid, 117 File:fcscs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:05:58 1995 consult your nearest Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. *[SC05300(ALL)01/95] Do not try to clean the windshield when the washer fluid container is empty or activate the washers at any time for more than 15 seconds continuously. This could damage the washer pump system. *[SC05350(ALL)01/95] RWARNING In freezing weather, warm up the windshield with the defroster before you use the washer fluid. If you do not do this, the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision. This may result in a collision, possibly injuring you and others. *[SC05500(ALL)04/95] *[SC05520(ALL)03/95] % For information about refilling the washer fluid or replacing your windshield wiper blades, see Windshield washer fluid and Wipers in the Index. Hazard Flasher [SC05540(ALL)05/89] one third page art:0000238-A Using the hazard flasher switch 118 File:fcscs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:05:58 1995 *[SC05560(ALL)03/95] The hazard flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to be careful when approaching or passing your vehicle. *[SC05590(ALL)03/95] The flashers work whether your vehicle is running or not. The flashers work for up to two hours when the battery is fully charged and in good condition without draining the battery excessively. If the flashers run for longer than two hours or if the battery is not fully charged, the battery can be drained. *[SC05600(ALL)01/95] *[SC05800(ALL)04/95] Horn % To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel. [SC06000(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0001403-B The horn on the steering wheel 119 File:fcscs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:05:58 1995 % *[SC06210(ALL)01/95] *[SC06400(ALL)04/95] Tilt Steering RWARNING Never adjust the steering column/wheel when the vehicle is moving. You could lose control of the vehicle and injure someone. [SC06650(ALL)11/94] one third page art:0000658-B The lever to tilt the steering wheel *[SC06800(ALL)04/95] To change the position of the steering column/wheel, pull the release lever on the column toward you. Tip the steering wheel to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in place. *[SC07400(ALL)03/91] *[SC07500(ALL)03/95] Speed Control (If equipped) % If your vehicle has speed control, you can automatically maintain a constant speed at or above 30 mph (50 km/h). *[SC07550(ALL)03/95] NOTE: Do not shift to N (Neutral) when using the speed control. This will cause the engine to overspeed. *[SC07600(ALL)04/95] Use of radio transmitting equipment that is not Federal Communications Commission (FCC) approved may cause the speed control to 120 File:fcscs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:05:58 1995 malfunction. Therefore, use only properly installed FCC approved radio transmitting equipment in your vehicle. [SC08000(ALL)11/94] one third page art:0001399-B The speed control buttons on the steering wheel *[SC08200(ALL)03/95] To set the speed control: [SC08400(ALL)11/94] 1. Press and release the ON switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate to indicate that speed control is in a standby mode. *[SC08500(ALL)04/95] 2. Accelerate to the desired speed above 30 mph (50 km/h) using the accelerator pedal. *[SC08800(ALL)03/95] 3. Press the SET ACCEL switch and release it immediately to set your speed. If you keep this switch pressed, your speed will continue to increase. *[SC08900(ALL)03/95] 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the speed you set. *[SC09000(ALL)01/95] If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle may momentarily slow down or speed up, even though the speed control is on. This is normal. 121 File:fcscs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:05:58 1995 [SC09011(ALL)02/95] NOTE: If your speed increases above your set speed while driving in j (Overdrive) on a downhill grade, you may want to shift to D (Drive) to reduce vehicle speed (or, turn j [Overdrive] off by depressing the O/D OFF switch on the gearshift lever). The speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it goes above your set speed on a downhill grade. For the best fuel economy during normal driving conditions, leave the gearshift in j (Overdrive), or resume as soon as practical. *[SC09100(ALL)03/95] RWARNING To keep control of your vehicle, do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. % Accelerating With the Speed Control Operating *[SC09300(ALL)03/95] You can use the accelerator pedal to speed up momentarily. When you take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle will return to the set speed. [SC09340(ALL)03/95] NOTE: When driving in hilly terrain, at high altitudes, or when pulling a trailer, you may want to drive in D (Drive) (or turn j [Overdrive] off by depressing the O/D OFF switch). This will improve speed control performance. *[SC09200(ALL)03/95] 122 File:fcscs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:05:58 1995 [SC09350(ALL)03/95] NOTE: When driving uphill, especially with a heavy load, you may notice your speed decreasing even if you have the speed control set. If the speed drops more than 8 to 14 mph (13-23 km/h) it is normal for the automatic speed control feature to be cancelled. You may need to use the accelerator pedal to help your vehicle maintain the selected speed when driving up steep grades. *[SC09400(ALL)01/95] *[SC09410(ALL)03/95] Resetting the Speed Control % To reset the speed control to a lower speed, use one of the following procedures: *[SC09415(ALL)03/95] ❑ COAST — Press and hold the COAST switch. *[SC09420(ALL)03/95] ❑ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle [SC09425(ALL)11/94] ❑ TAP-DOWN — Press and then quickly Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed. attains the desired speed, press the SET ACCEL switch and release it immediately. release the COAST switch. Each time you “tap” the switch, the set speed will decrease by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Multiple taps will cause the set speed to decrease in increments of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). For example, if the current set speed is 60 mph (96 km/h) 5 taps of the COAST switch will decrease the vehicle speed and SET it at 55 mph (88 km/h). *[SC09430(ALL)04/95] If vehicle speed is reduced below 30 mph (50 km/h) by any of the above methods, then you must manually accelerate to a speed over 30 mph (50 km/h) and reset the system. 123 File:fcscs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:05:58 1995 [SC09435(ALL)02/95] To reset the speed control to a higher speed, use one of the following procedures: *[SC09440(ALL)03/95] ❑ ACCEL — Press and hold the SET ACCEL *[SC09445(ALL)03/95] ❑ Depress the accelerator pedal. When the [SC09450(ALL)11/94] ❑ TAP-UP — Press and then quickly release the switch. Release the switch when the vehicle has accelerated to the desired speed. vehicle attains the desired speed, press the SET ACCEL switch and release it immediately. SET ACCEL switch. Each time you “tap” the switch, the set speed will increase by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Multiple taps will cause the set speed to increase in increments of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). For example, if the current set speed is 55 mph (88 km/h) 5 taps of the SET ACCEL switch will increase the vehicle speed and SET it at 60 mph (96 km/h). % Cancelling and Resuming a Set Speed [SC11000(ALL)04/95] If you press the brake pedal, speed control is cancelled. You can return to the set speed by pressing the RESUME switch, as long as you did not press the OFF switch. You must be driving at least 30 mph (50 km/h). *[SC11300(ALL)03/95] Your vehicle will gradually return to the previously set speed and then maintain it. *[SC11315(ALL)03/95] *[SC11325(ALL)04/95] *[SC11400(ALL)04/95] To Turn Off the Speed Control System *[SC10900(ALL)03/95] % Press the OFF switch. In addition, the speed control is turned off each time you turn the vehicle off. 124 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 Features *[FV00400(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle has a variety of features designed for your comfort, convenience and safety. Read this chapter to find out about standard and optional features. % Doors [FV01700(ALL)11/94] Childproof Locks [FV01800(ALL)02/95] In addition to standard or power locks, your vehicle has childproof locks for the rear doors. If you set these locks, the doors cannot be opened from the inside of the vehicle. The doors can still be opened from the outside when the lock knobs are raised. *[FV00500(ALL)01/95] [FV02200(ALL)08/95] half page art:0000448-D The childproof locks for the rear door 125 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 *[FV02300(ALL)03/95] To set the childproof lock on each rear door, open the rear door. [FV02500(ALL)02/95] Find the lever inside the label. Move the lever up to the locked symbol. [FV02700(ALL)02/95] To release the childproof lock, open the rear door from the outside. Move the lever down to the unlocked symbol. % Power Door Locks (If equipped) [FV03830(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle has power door locks, the controls to lock the doors are on the trim panel of the front door. When you close the doors after you set the door locks, the doors remain locked. If the power mechanism ever fails, the manual door lock will override the power controls. *[FV03700(ALL)05/91] [FV03950(ALL)11/94] one third page art:0000963-F The power locks on the driver’s door [FV04000(ALL)04/95] If the key is left in the driver’s or passenger’s outside lock cylinder for a period of time, the power door locks may cycle. This is a protective feature and will not harm the locks. When the key is removed, the locks will function normally. 126 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV04010(ALL)04/95] Central Locking [FV04020(ALL)04/95] When you are unlocking the driver or front passenger door with the key, turn it once toward the front of the vehicle to unlock that door only. Turn the key a second time to unlock all doors. Turn the key once toward the rear of the vehicle to lock all doors. [FV04050(ALL)04/95] Lock Disable [FV04075(ALL)03/95] The lock disable feature helps prevent you from locking the keys in your vehicle. With the key in the ignition (in any switch position) and the driver’s door open, the driver’s door cannot be locked using the front door power lock switch. [FV04100(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle can still be locked, while the key is in the ignition, by manually pressing down the lock button. [FV04125(ALL)02/95] Power liftgate lock — wagon (If equipped) [FV04150(ALL)02/95] The power liftgate lock is on the right inside trim panel in the cargo area. When this lock is pressed, all doors and the liftgate lock. [FV04175(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0001407-A The power liftgate lock 127 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 % Using the Keyless Entry System (If equipped) *[FV04301(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle has the keyless entry system, you can lock or unlock the vehicle doors without using a key. The buttons for the system are near the outside door handle on the driver’s side. See also Remote Entry System which follows this description. *[FV04251(ALL)03/95] [FV04351(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0000482-C Keyless entry buttons *[FV04401(ALL)02/95] When you bought your vehicle, you were given a computer code that operates the system for your vehicle. For your convenience, we have duplicated this code in two places. *[FV04451(ALL)02/95] *[FV04501(ALL)02/95] The code is: *[FV04551(ALL)02/95] ❑ taped to the computer module [FV04601(ALL)03/95] When you use this entry system, the illuminated entry system turns on the interior lights for 25 seconds and the buttons on the keypad light up for 5 seconds. Do not push the buttons with a key, ballpoint pen, pencil or any other hard object. These objects could damage the buttons. ❑ on your owner’s wallet card found in the glove compartment 128 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 *[FV04651(ALL)02/95] *[FV04700(ALL)02/95] Programming your own entry code *[FV04751(ALL)02/95] *[FV04801(ALL)02/95] *[FV04851(ALL)02/95] *[FV04901(ALL)02/95] *[FV04951(ALL)02/95] To program your own code: 1. Select five digits for your personal code. 2. Enter the permanent code that the dealership gave you. 3. Within five seconds, press 1/2. 4. Within five seconds of pressing 1/2, enter your personal code, pressing each digit within five seconds of the previous digit. *[FV05000(ALL)02/95] The keyless entry system registers this second code. To open your vehicle, you can now use either code. The module remembers only one personal code at a time. Entering a second personal code will erase the first, replacing it with the new second one. % You can program a personal code to unlock your vehicle with the keypad. This code does not replace the permanent code that the dealership gave you. Use your personal code in the same manner as you would your original code. *[FV05050(ALL)02/95] *[FV05101(ALL)02/95] *[FV05150(ALL)02/95] *[FV05201(ALL)02/95] *[FV05250(ALL)02/95] To erase your personal code: *[FV05301(ALL)02/95] Do not set a code that presents the numbers in sequential order, such as 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/0. Studies show that people who idly press the buttons usually press a sequential pattern. Also, do not select a code that uses the same button five times. Thieves can easily figure out these types of codes. 1. Enter the original permanent code. 2. Press 1/2 within five seconds of Step 1. 3. Wait six seconds. The keyless entry system automatically erases your personal code. The system will now only respond to the permanent code. 129 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 % Unlocking the doors with the keyless entry system *[FV05401(ALL)02/95] You must unlock the driver’s door before you unlock any of the other doors. If you let more than five seconds pass between pressing numbers, the system shuts down, and you have to enter the code again. The system has shut down if the keypad light is out. If the keyless entry system does not work properly, use the key or transmitter(s) to lock and unlock the doors. *[FV05450(ALL)02/95] 1. To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory code or your personal code. All codes have five numbers. After you press the fifth number, the driver’s door unlocks. [FV05500(ALL)04/95] 2. To unlock the passenger’s door(s) and liftgate (wagon), press the 3/4 button within five seconds of unlocking the driver’s door or re-enter the code to open the driver’s door, then press 3/4. [FV05525(ALL)03/95] 3. To open the trunk (sedan) or unlock the liftgate (wagon), enter the five-digit factory code, then press the 5/6 button within 5 seconds. *[FV05550(ALL)02/95] Locking the doors with the keyless entry system *[FV05601(ALL)02/95] Along with unlocking your doors, you can use the keyless entry system to lock the doors. You can also use the Autolock feature to automatically lock the doors after you get in the vehicle. *[FV05650(ALL)02/95] To lock all of the doors, press 7/8 and 9/0 at the same time. It is not necessary to first enter the keypad code. This will arm your factory installed anti-theft system, if so equipped. *[FV05350(ALL)02/95] 130 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV05701(ALL)03/95] Arming, disarming and resetting your perimeter anti-theft system (If equipped) from the keyless entry pad *[FV05750(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optional factory installed anti-theft system, the keyless entry system will arm it when you use the 7/8 and 9/0 keys to lock the doors, and will disarm or reset a triggered anti-theft alarm when you enter in the five digit code to unlock the driver’s door. *[FV05800(ALL)03/95] NOTE: Doors and the liftgate must be fully closed for the anti-theft system to arm. Refer to the Anti-Theft System section in this chapter for more details. [FV05850(ALL)04/95] Autolock (If equipped) *[FV05900(ALL)02/95] The Autolock feature is part of your remote keyless entry system and is enabled at the factory. With the Autolock feature enabled, all of the doors will automatically lock when: [FV05950(ALL)04/95] ❑ the vehicle doors and liftgate are fully closed ❑ the ignition key is turned to the ON position ❑ the brake pedal is pressed ❑ you shift through (Reverse) ❑ one second has elapsed after the brake pedal *[FV06001(ALL)02/95] *[FV06050(ALL)02/95] *[FV06100(ALL)02/95] *[FV06150(ALL)08/95] is released *[FV06200(ALL)02/95] The Autolock feature will repeat when: [FV06250(ALL)04/95] ❑ a door is opened and then all doors and liftgate are closed *[FV06300(ALL)02/95] ❑ the brake pedal is released 131 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 *[FV06400(ALL)02/95] The doors may not lock automatically at the correct time if the driver: *[FV06450(ALL)02/95] ❑ shifts through gears without pressing the *[FV06500(ALL)02/95] ❑ shifts through gears quickly after starting the *[FV06550(ALL)02/95] ❑ releases their foot from the brake while *[FV06575(ALL)04/95] You can deactivate the system by using the buttons for the keyless entry system if you don’t want to use the Autolock feature. *[FV06600(ALL)02/95] *[FV06650(ALL)02/95] To deactivate the Autolock system: 1. Enter your permanent five-digit entry code (not the user code you may have set). *[FV06700(ALL)02/95] *[FV06750(ALL)02/95] 2. Within 5 seconds, press and hold 7/8. 3. Within 5 more seconds, press and release 3/4. *[FV06800(ALL)02/95] *[FV06850(ALL)02/95] 4. Release 7/8. *[FV06900(ALL)04/95] You can also deactivate or reactivate the Autolock feature by this method: [FV06950(ALL)04/95] 1. Make sure the anti-theft system is not armed or triggered, ignition is off, and all doors and liftgate are closed. *[FV07000(ALL)02/95] *[FV07050(ALL)02/95] *[FV07100(ALL)02/95] 2. Turn the ignition key from OFF to RUN. 3. Press the door power unlock button 3 times. 4. Turn the ignition key from RUN to OFF. brake vehicle someone has stepped out of the vehicle for a moment To reactivate the Autolock system, simply repeat the instructions for deactivating the system. By re-entering the code that deactivates the Autolock, the keyless entry system reinstates the Autolock feature. 132 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 *[FV07150(ALL)02/95] *[FV07200(ALL)02/95] 5. Press the door power unlock button 3 times. 6. Turn the ignition key back to RUN within 30 seconds of step 2. *[FV07250(ALL)02/95] 7. The horn should chirp once. If not, wait 30 seconds and repeat steps 1 through 6. *[FV07300(ALL)02/95] *[FV07350(ALL)02/95] *[FV07400(ALL)02/95] 8. Press the door power unlock button. 9. Press the door power lock button. *[FV07450(ALL)02/95] 11. Turn the ignition OFF. [FV07550(ALL)03/95] Remote Entry System (If equipped) *[FV07600(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle has the remote entry system, you can lock or unlock the vehicle doors and liftgate without using a key. The remote also has a personal alarm feature. The buttons for the system are located on the two hand held transmitters that came with your vehicle. *[FV07650(ALL)02/95] The system will work with up to four transmitters. Your vehicle came with two transmitters. Additional transmitters can be ordered from your dealer. *[FV07700(ALL)02/95] The remote entry features only operate with the ignition in the OFF position. 10. The horn will chirp once if the Autolock feature was deactivated, twice (one short chirp followed by a long chirp) if the Autolock feature was activated. 133 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV07751(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0001000-A Remote entry transmitter % Unlocking the doors with the remote entry system *[FV07851(ALL)02/95] To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK button. *[FV07901(ALL)02/95] To unlock the other doors and liftgate, press the UNLOCK button a second time, within five seconds after the first UNLOCK. [FV07910(ALL)04/95] To open the trunk (sedan), press the TRUNK button. [FV07920(ALL)04/95] To unlock the liftgate (wagon), press the TRUNK button. To open the liftgate, you must press the liftgate release located above the license plate. *[FV07951(ALL)02/95] Locking the doors with the remote entry system *[FV08001(ALL)02/95] To lock all the doors and liftgate, press the LOCK button. This will also arm the factory installed Anti-Theft system. [FV08051(ALL)04/95] If you would like a signal that the doors are being locked, press the LOCK button again within five seconds. If all doors and the liftgate are completely closed, the doors and liftgate will *[FV07801(ALL)02/95] 134 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 lock again, the horn will chirp and the external lamps will flash. If a door or the liftgate is open or ajar, the horn will give two short chirps warning you that a door or the liftgate is open. *[FV08100(ALL)02/95] *[FV08151(ALL)02/95] Remote entry personal alarm *[FV08200(ALL)02/95] When you use the remote entry UNLOCK or PANIC buttons, the illuminated entry system turns on the vehicle’s interior lights for 25 seconds. You can turn these lights off with the remote entry LOCK button or by turning the ignition to the ON or ACCESSORY position. [FV08251(ALL)04/95] THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. % If you wish to activate the remote entry system personal alarm, press the PANIC button. This will honk the horn and flash the lights for approximately 2 minutes 45 seconds. You can turn it off by pressing the PANIC button again from the transmitter or by turning the ignition to the ON or ACCESSORY position. % Arming and Disarming the Alarm System with Remote Entry *[FV08351(ALL)04/95] Your Remote Entry System will automatically arm the factory installed Anti-Theft System when the doors are locked, and automatically disarm it when the doors are unlocked. The remote will also reset the anti-theft alarm (when the driver’s door is unlocked or the PANIC button is pressed on a programmed remote entry transmitter) if it was triggered. *[FV08300(ALL)04/95] 135 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 *[FV08400(ALL)04/95] The remote entry system may not arm and disarm non-factory installed anti-theft systems. *[FV08451(ALL)02/95] *[FV08500(ALL)02/95] Replacing the batteries *[FV08551(ALL)02/95] NOTE: The operating range of the remote entry system can also be affected by weather conditions (such as very cold temperatures) or structures around the vehicle (buildings, other vehicles, radio and TV towers, etc.). Typical operating range will allow you to be up to 33 feet (10 meters) away from your vehicle. *[FV08600(ALL)02/95] The transmitter can be snapped apart to replace the batteries by twisting a thin coin between the two halves of the transmitter. DO NOT TAKE THE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTER APART. When installing the new batteries, be sure to place the positive (+) side down as marked. Snap the two halves back together. % The remote entry transmitter is powered by two coin type three-volt lithium 2016 batteries (included) that should last for several years of normal use. If you notice a significant decrease in operating range, the batteries should be replaced. Replacement batteries can be purchased at most pharmacies, watch stores or at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. [FV08651(ALL)02/95] quarter page art:0020790-A Replacing the batteries 136 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 *[FV08700(ALL)02/95] *[FV08751(ALL)02/95] Replacing lost transmitters *[FV08800(ALL)02/95] You can also purchase additional transmitters (up to 4 transmitters can be used) from your dealer. You will need to take all your transmitters to the dealer so they can program them to the remote entry system all at the same time. [FV08851(ALL)04/95] Illuminated Entry System *[FV08900(ALL)04/95] This system will provide illumination of the vehicle’s interior courtesy lamps when either outside front door handle is pulled or when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door or sound the personal alarm. The system will automatically turn off after approximately 25 seconds or when the ignition is turned to the START or ACC position. *[FV08951(ALL)02/95] NOTE: The inside lights will not turn off if you have turned them on with the dimmer thumbwheel or if any door is open. [FV09551(ALL)04/95] Perimeter Anti-Theft System (If equipped) *[FV09600(ALL)04/95] When armed, this system helps protect your vehicle against break-ins or theft. % In the event a transmitter is lost, you should take all your vehicle’s transmitters to your dealer to have the remote entry system deprogrammed for the lost transmitter. This is necessary to prevent further unauthorized use of the lost transmitter. % When an unauthorized entry occurs, the system triggers and will: *[FV09700(ALL)02/95] ❑ flash the headlamps, parking lamps, and theft *[FV09751(ALL)04/95] ❑ chirp the horn *[FV09651(ALL)04/95] indicator lamp 137 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV09801(ALL)04/95] Arming the system *[FV09851(ALL)04/95] The system is ready to arm any time the ignition switch is turned OFF and the alarm is not triggered or sounding. Any of the following events will prearm the anti-theft system: [FV09900(ALL)04/95] ❑ Pressing the remote entry transmitter LOCK button to lock the doors (with the doors open or closed). [FV09951(ALL)04/95] ❑ Pressing the 7/8 and 9/10 buttons on the Keyless Entry Keypad at the same time to lock the doors (with the doors open or closed). *[FV10001(ALL)04/95] ❑ Opening a door and pressing the power door [FV10050(ALL)04/95] ❑ Turning the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock button to lock the doors. key to the LOCK position to centrally lock all doors (with the doors open or closed). *[FV10100(ALL)04/95] If a door or the liftgate is open, the anti-theft system is prearmed and waiting for all doors to close. The THEFT indicator in the instrument panel will light continuously while the system is prearmed. *[FV10201(ALL)04/95] Once all doors and the liftgate are closed, if any were open, the system will begin a 30 second countdown to become armed. The 30 second countdown allows people who may still be in the vehicle time to exit without triggering the alarm. The THEFT indicator will glow steadily until the system is armed. When the system is armed, the THEFT indicator will begin to flash with short flashes every 2 seconds until the system is triggered or disarmed. *[FV10251(ALL)02/95] Remember, all doors and the liftgate must be fully closed for the anti-theft system to arm. If a door or the liftgate has been left open or ajar, and you press the remote entry transmitter twice 138 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 to confirm the doors are locked, two short horn chirps will warn you that the anti-theft system is not arming. *[FV10301(ALL)04/95] The anti-theft system is designed to work with the factory installed remote entry system. It may not work with other remote entry systems. *[FV10351(ALL)02/95] When you get a single horn chirp by pressing the LOCK button twice within 5 seconds on your remote entry transmitter, you can be assured that all doors are locked and the anti-theft system is arming. [FV10400(ALL)04/95] Disarming the system *[FV10451(ALL)04/95] An armed or triggered system can be disarmed if you: *[FV10501(ALL)04/95] ❑ Unlock the doors by pressing the remote *[FV10551(ALL)04/95] ❑ Unlock the doors by entering the unlock code *[FV10601(ALL)02/95] *[FV10651(ALL)02/95] *[FV10700(ALL)04/95] ❑ Unlock any door or the liftgate with a key. ❑ Turn ignition to the ON or ACC position. ❑ Pressing the remote entry PANIC button will *[FV10751(ALL)02/95] When unlocking the vehicle with a key, turn the key all the way to the end of its travel or the system may not disarm. [FV10800(ALL)04/95] NOTE: the flashing lights and honking horn will shut off automatically within 2 minutes 45 seconds after the system is triggered. It will trigger again if another intrusion occurs. entry transmitter UNLOCK button. on the keyless entry keypad. disarm the anti-theft system only when the anti-theft alarm is triggered and sounding. 139 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV10802(ALL)04/95] Coded Key Anti-Theft System [FV10804(ALL)08/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the coded key anti-theft system, you can only use an electronically coded key to start the vehicle. During each vehicle start, the coded key is “read” by the anti-theft system. If the key’s ID code matches that in the anti-theft system, the vehicle is enabled to start. If the key’s ID code does not match the anti-theft system, or if no coded key is detected, then the vehicle is not able to start. Your vehicle will need to be taken to the dealership for re-initializaiton if either of the following situations occur: [FV10805(ALL)07/95] ❑ Both supplied keys are lost or stolen. ❑ Only one key has been lost, but you want to [FV10807(ALL)07/95] ensure the “lost” key will not start the vehicle. In this case, bring the remaining key(s) to the dealer for re-programming. [FV10808(ALL)04/95] [FV10810(ALL)04/95] [FV10812(ALL)04/95] [FV10814(ALL)04/95] THEFT indicator The anti-theft indicator (THEFT) in the instrument cluster will light for 2 seconds and then go out when the ignition is turned to the ON or START position. If it does not light or if it flashes, have the system serviced by your dealer or a qualified technician. Programming additional keys Two electronically coded keys were supplied with your vehicle. Additional keys can be purchased as spares, up to a total of 16 keys. To program a new key, use a coded key and the following procedure: [FV10816(ALL)04/95] 1. With the coded key in the ignition, turn the ignition from the ON to the OFF position. [FV10820(ALL)04/95] 2. Within 15 seconds, insert the new electronic key in the ignition and turn it to ON or START. The key must have the correct mechanical cut. 140 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV10825(ALL)04/95] If the key has been coded, the anti-theft indicator will come on for two seconds. The key can then be used to start the vehicle. Repeat until all spare keys have been coded. [FV10828(ALL)04/95] If the key coding failed, the anti-theft indicator will flash and the vehicle cannot be started with the new key. Coding failure can be caused by the following: [FV10830(ALL)04/95] ❑ The new key was not inserted within 15 seconds, or [FV10832(ALL)04/95] [FV10835(ALL)04/95] ❑ 16 keys have already been programmed, or ❑ The key does not have an electronic code. [FV10838(ALL)04/95] Try the coding procedure again. If it fails again, see your dealer or a qualified technician. *[FV10850(ALL)02/95] % [FV10900(ALL)02/95] * *[FV10950(ALL)02/95] Windows % Using the Power Windows Each door has a power control that opens and closes the window on that door. The driver’s door has a master control panel that operates all four windows. [FV11001(ALL)02/95] The power windows only operate when the ignition key is in the ON or ACC position or when the ignition has been turned from the ON to the OFF position and/or the key has been removed and no front doors on the vehicle have been opened. [FV11050(ALL)02/95] The power window controls are illuminated. *[FV11100(ALL)02/95] RWARNING Do not let children play with the power windows. They may seriously hurt themselves. 141 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV11150(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0000417-D The master controls on the driver’s door *[FV11201(ALL)08/95] % Your vehicle is equipped with a “one touch down” feature. This feature allows the driver to fully open the driver’s window by firmly pressing the switch and then releasing. The “one touch down” feature can be stopped by pressing the up or down switch again. [FV11250(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0000418-D The window controls on the passenger’s door [FV11270(ALL)03/95] Accessory Delay [FV11290(ALL)04/95] The power windows and moon roof (if equipped) can be operated for 45 seconds after the ignition has been turned to the OFF position if the front doors have not been opened. 142 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 % Moon Roof (If equipped) [FV11351(ALL)03/95] You can use the moon roof in your vehicle in two ways. Move it back to open the glass panel, or you can move it up to ventilate the vehicle. [FV11400(ALL)02/95] The moon roof will only operate when the ignition is in the ON or ACC position or when the key has been removed from the ignition and no doors have been opened. *[FV11301(ALL)02/95] [FV11451(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0000419-D The map lamps and the switches for the moon roof [FV11500(ALL)02/95] The roof console SLIDE switch is used to open and close the moon roof. [FV11550(ALL)04/95] Press the AUTO portion of the switch and the roof will fully open automatically. Press the switch again during the opening cycle and the roof will stop at that location. [FV11600(ALL)04/95] To close the moon roof, press and hold the front portion of the switch. At the fully closed position, the motor automatically turns off. [FV11850(ALL)02/95] The roof console TILT switch is used to tilt the moon roof. [FV11900(ALL)04/95] To tilt the moon roof into vent position from the closed position, press the UP portion of the switch. 143 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 *[FV12000(ALL)04/95] To close from vent position, press and hold the DN portion of the switch. *[FV12100(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Do not let children play with the moon roof. They may seriously hurt themselves. *[FV12200(ALL)01/95] Occasionally wiping the outside guide rail covers of the moon roof with a clean cloth will help keep the moon roof working properly. [FV12300(ALL)11/94] quarter page art:0000420-B The moon roof *[FV12400(ALL)01/95] *[FV12500(ALL)01/95] Sliding Shade *[FV12600(ALL)01/95] To close the sliding shade, pull the shade toward the front of the vehicle. The shade automatically opens and locks when the moon roof is opened. The moon roof has a sliding shade that you can manually open or close to block the sun when the glass panel is shut. 144 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 % *[FV12700(ALL)01/95] % [FV12702(ALL)04/95] * *[FV12704(ALL)02/95] *[FV12705(ALL)04/95] Seats Head Restraints If you use them properly, head restraints are intended to help protect your head and neck in a collision. RWARNING A head restraint helps protect you best if you position it behind your head and not behind your neck. *[FV12706(ALL)02/95] *[FV12708(ALL)01/95] Standard head restraints You can adjust the head restraints for your comfort and protection. [FV12714(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0000031-E Adjusting the standard head restraint 145 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 *[FV12720(ALL)01/95] Four-way head restraints [FV12722(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle may have a four-way head restraint. It can be adjusted in four directions. You can raise it about two inches (five cm) from its normal position, and you can move it forward up to 60 degrees until you reach the desired position. [FV12724(ALL)03/92] one third page art:0010049-B Adjusting the four-way head restraint % Manual Seats [FV13000(ALL)04/95] You can move the front seats forward or backward and tilt the seatback forward or backward. *[FV12900(ALL)03/95] [FV13200(ALL)04/95] quarter page art:0000421-C The front seat adjustment bar 146 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV13300(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0000422-C The handle to recline the back of the driver’s seat *[FV13900(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving. You could lose control of the vehicle and injure someone. *[FV13950(ALL)02/95] RWARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug across the hips to reduce the risk of serious injury to the abdomen or neck that could be caused by sliding under the safety belts in a collision. *[FV15650(ALL)04/95] RWARNING Luggage or other cargo should not be piled higher than the seatbacks. This will help keep items from being thrown about and injuring people in a collision or sudden stop. 147 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 % Power Seats (If equipped) [FV22000(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle has power seats, you can adjust the driver’s seat in several directions. You can raise or lower the whole front seat, move the seat forward or backward and tilt the front and back of the seat up or down. If your vehicle is equipped with power lumbar support, the lumbar switch also lets you inflate a pad on the seatback. *[FV21900(ALL)02/95] [FV22200(ALL)02/95] half page art:0000423-D The seat controls on the driver’s seat 148 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV22800(ALL)05/94] Inflating the lumbar support (If equipped) [FV22950(ALL)04/89] To inflate the pads, press and hold the front of the switch. To deflate the pads, press and hold the back of the switch. [FV23000(ALL)11/94] one third page art:0000424-B The seat controls for the lumbar support on the driver’s seat *[FV23100(ALL)11/94] *[FV23125(ALL)11/94] Using the Split-Folding Rear Seat [FV23150(ALL)04/95] Detach the shoulder belt from the lap belt in the center rear seating position before folding down the passenger side of the rear seat. [FV23175(ALL)11/94] To lower the rear seatback from inside the vehicle: [FV23225(ALL)02/95] 1. Lift the seatback release handle on the upper outboard corner of the seatback. [FV23250(ALL)02/95] 2. Grasp the pull tab and fold the seatback forward until it rests on the cushion. % Your vehicle is equipped with split-folding rear seats. One or both rear seatbacks can be folded down to provide additional cargo space. 149 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV23260(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0001379-A Folding down the rear seatbacks *[FV23275(ALL)11/94] To raise the seatback: [FV23325(ALL)02/95] 1. Lift the seatback rearward until it is in the upright position. Push the center of the seat until you hear it latch. *[FV23330(ALL)11/94] 2. Make sure the seatback is locked in position by pushing forward and backward on it. *[FV23360(ALL)11/94] RWARNING If you do not securely latch the seatback in the upright position, the seatback or objects could be thrown forward during a sudden stop or collision, possibly injuring you or other passengers. 150 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV23375(ALL)11/94] To lower the rear seatback from the trunk: [FV23390(ALL)11/94] 1. Move the release lever on the back of the rear seatback to the OPEN position. [FV23420(ALL)11/94] 2. Fold the seatback forward. [FV23421(ALL)04/95] quarter page art:0001406-B The seatback release lever in the trunk *[FV23422(ALL)04/95] *[FV23424(ALL)04/95] *[FV23426(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Seats *[FV23427(ALL)04/95] *[FV23428(ALL)04/95] Fabric *[FV23429(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on a small, hidden area of fabric. If the fabric’s color or texture is adversely affected by a particular cleaner, do not use it. % Leather and vinyl For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a leather and vinyl cleaner or a mild soap. Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spots immediately. Follow the directions that come with the cleaner. 151 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV23500(ALL)04/95] Positive Retention Driver’s Side Floor Mat (If equipped) [FV23520(ALL)04/95] Installing the Floor Mat *[FV23530(ALL)01/95] Position the floor mat in the footwell. Place the mat eyelet over the pointed end of the retention post from the rear and rotate forward to install. Adjust the floor mat position to allow proper operation of accelerator pedal, brake pedal and clutch pedal. [FV23550(ALL)11/94] half page art:0001094-B The positive retention floor mat [FV23560(ALL)04/95] Removing the Floor Mat *[FV23570(ALL)01/95] Lift floor mat just forward of retention post and rotate rearward to disengage from retention post. 152 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 % Mirrors [FV24800(ALL)04/95] Side View Mirrors [FV25200(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle comes with electric adjustable and heated side view mirrors. The outside rearview mirror on the right is a convex mirror. This mirror gives you a wider view of the lanes on your right and behind you. *[FV23600(ALL)01/95] [FV25600(ALL)04/95] RWARNING Be careful. The convex outside rearview mirror on the right makes objects appear smaller and farther away than they actually are. Use the inside rearview mirror (or look behind you) to determine the actual size and distance of objects that appear in the convex mirror. [FV25800(ALL)11/94] one third page art:0000428-C The mirror controls on the driver’s door [FV26200(ALL)04/95] To adjust the side view mirrors *[FV26900(ALL)01/95] 1. Find the control switch in the driver’s door panel. [FV27000(ALL)02/95] 2. Select the right or left mirror by moving the selector switch to the right or the left. 153 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV27100(ALL)01/89] 3. Move the control knob in the direction you want to move the mirror. *[FV27200(ALL)01/95] 4. Return the selector switch to the middle position to keep the mirror in place. [FV27250(ALL)02/95] 5. To activate the heated feature of the outside rearview mirror, turn on the rear window defrost by pushing the R-DEF button on the instrument panel. % Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products. *[FV27300(ALL)01/95] *[FV27400(ALL)03/95] Sun Visors *[FV27275(ALL)01/95] % Using the Sun Visors [FV27500(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle may have special sun visors. Besides the regular sun visor, you may have a second sun visor. By using both the regular sun visor and the second visor, you shield the sun from both the front and the side of the vehicle at the same time. *[FV27600(ALL)03/95] To block the sun, move the main visor sideways and flip the second visor down. [FV27700(ALL)11/94] one third page art:0001408-A The sun visor 154 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 % Turning on the Mirror Light on the Sun Visors (If equipped) [FV28500(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle has two different kinds of lighted mirrors. Your vehicle may have one or both of these lighted mirrors. [FV28600(ALL)11/94] To turn on the driver’s mirror that is attached to the visor, lift the mirror cover. Adjust the amount of light by sliding the switch. *[FV27800(ALL)05/94] [FV28700(ALL)11/94] quarter page art:0000430-C The mirror on the driver’s sun visor [FV28900(ALL)11/94] quarter page art:0000431-C The mirror on the passenger’s sun visor [FV29100(ALL)11/94] To turn on the passenger’s mirror that is in the main visor, grasp the lower center portion and pull the mirror down. Adjust the amount of light by sliding the switch. 155 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 % *[FV29400(ALL)01/95] *[FV29500(ALL)01/95] Console Your vehicle may have a full console. The full console has the following features: [FV29601(ALL)04/95] two third page art:0000432-G Features of the full console [FV29650(ALL)04/95] The release for opening the utility compartment is on the front of the console, just below the armrest. Press and release at the ridges, near the driver’s seat, to open. The lid is spring-loaded and will open automatically. [FV29675(ALL)04/95] If your vehicle is equipped with a cellular phone, press the latch release located on the driver’s-side edge of the lid to access the phone. 156 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV29750(ALL)11/94] To open the cupholder on the full console, press and release the door on the front of the console. The door is spring-loaded and will open automatically. [FV29875(ALL)04/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the column shift, it has a center seating/stowage console in the center front seating position. The center seating/stowage console has the following features: [FV29900(ALL)04/95] half page art:0001380-B Features of the center seating/stowage console [FV29925(ALL)04/95] To open the storage compartment, raise the armrest and pull the strap on the seat up and toward the instrument panel. [FV29950(ALL)04/95] The cupholders in the center seating/stowage console can be removed for cleaning. 157 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 *[FV29975(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you in a collision. [FV30101(ALL)04/95] Cellular Phone (If equipped) [FV30201(ALL)04/95] For information about the cellular phone in your vehicle, refer to the Cellular Phone User’s Manual provided with your phone. For further questions about your cellular phone, contact the Ford Cellular System at 1-800-367-3013 (U.S.). In Canada, please contact your dealer. *[FV30301(ALL)04/95] NOTE: It is recommended that you fold your cellular phone antenna down onto the back glass before entering a car wash. [FV30400(ALL)04/95] Ashtrays [FV30500(ALL)04/95] The ashtray can be converted to a storage compartment for small objects by removing the plastic heatproof liner. [FV30600(ALL)04/95] NOTE: The heatproof plastic liner must be in position for use as an ashtray. *[FV32100(ALL)01/95] *[FV32200(ALL)01/95] Trunk % Opening the Trunk Manually [FV32600(ALL)02/95] To open the trunk from the outside, turn the key to the right until the trunk opens. [FV32900(ALL)11/94] Remove the key before you close and lock the lid. Shut the trunk lid completely. 158 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV33100(ALL)04/95] Using the Remote Control for the Trunk [FV33200(ALL)04/95] Press the remote release on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel to open the trunk. [FV33300(ALL)11/94] one third page art:0000434-C The remote control for the trunk [FV36200(ALL)05/94] Special Features of Your Wagon [FV36300(ALL)02/95] Liftgate [FV36400(ALL)01/89] Your wagon has a two-way liftgate that lets you either open the entire liftgate or just the window. [FV36450(ALL)02/95] To open the liftgate, press the release that is hidden under the exterior trim panel just above the license plate. Pull up on the handle to raise the liftgate. [FV36500(ALL)02/95] The liftgate will not lock automatically when you close it. To lock the liftgate with the key, turn left. You can also use the central power lock on the driver’s door or the LOCK button on the remote entry keyfob, if your vehicle is so equipped. [FV36550(ALL)02/95] When the liftgate is locked, the window will also lock. 159 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV36600(ALL)02/95] To open the window, make sure the liftgate and window are unlocked, then press the outside lock cylinder. You can only open the window from outside. [FV36700(ALL)01/89] To prevent any damage, close the liftgate and window before you drive. [FV36800(ALL)04/95] half page art:0000437-F The liftgate [FV37050(ALL)03/90] RWARNING If you drive with the liftgate window open, you will draw dangerous exhaust fumes into your vehicle. If you must drive like this, keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle. 160 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV37200(ALL)11/94] The Storage Area [FV37300(ALL)10/90] Loading the vehicle [FV37400(ALL)10/90] When you load the back of your vehicle, put the load as far forward in the compartment as possible. This will help distribute the weight more evenly between the front and rear axles. [FV37700(ALL)02/95] Storage compartments [FV37800(ALL)02/95] Your wagon comes with a storage compartment in the floor of the cargo area. An additional storage compartment is in the rear trim panel on the right. [FV38000(ALL)04/95] half page art:0001409-C The locking storage compartment in the rear of the wagon 161 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV38150(ALL)04/95] Cargo Net (If equipped) [FV38200(ALL)02/95] The cargo net secures lightweight objects in the cargo area of your vehicle. The net attaches to anchors that are already in your trunk. Use all available anchors to restrain the objects or they will not be secured. [FV38300(ALL)05/91] one third page art:0000441-B The cargo net for the wagon [FV38400(ALL)04/95] Do not put more than 50 pounds (22 kg) in the net. Any ropes or cords that you use must be as strong as the cargo net or strong enough to restrain a 50-pound (22 kg) object. [FV38450(ALL)04/95] This net is not designed to retain objects during an accident. [FV38500(ALL)11/94] Cargo Cover (If equipped) [FV38600(ALL)01/89] You can conceal luggage or cargo in the back of your wagon with the cargo cover. [FV38700(ALL)01/89] To cover the back compartment: [FV38800(ALL)02/95] 1. 162 Fasten the cover into the molded pockets in the trim panel. Make sure the cover is right side up, so it unrolls from the top. File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV38900(ALL)04/95] 2. Pull the end of the cover toward you and hook it into the rear molded pockets in the side trim panels in the rear, inserting the right side first. [FV39000(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0001471-A The cargo cover [FV39200(ALL)11/94] Luggage Rack [FV39300(ALL)02/95] You can move the rear luggage crossbar on top of the vehicle to fit the item you need to carry. The front crossbar does not move. [FV39400(ALL)10/90] To adjust the luggage rack: [FV39500(ALL)02/95] 1. Load your luggage close to the front crossbar. Do not carry more than 100 pounds (45 kg) or cause the vehicle to exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR), which is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. [FV39600(ALL)02/95] 2. Loosen the adjusting levers on the rear crossbar by pushing them toward the center of the vehicle. 163 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV39700(ALL)10/90] 3. Slide the rear crossbar forward to hold your luggage securely in place. [FV39800(ALL)02/95] 4. Clamp the adjusting levers again by pulling them toward the outside of the vehicle. [FV39825(ALL)00/95] Make sure that the rear crossbar pins are locked in slots by pulling forward and back on each of the outside supports. If the crossbar slides, push or pull until you hear it click and feel it lock into position. [FV39850(ALL)02/95] 5. Secure luggage or cargo with rope (up to 3/8"), NOT ELASTIC CORD, using the tie down loops provided. There are three loops on each outside rail and one at each end of the cross bars. [FV39875(ALL)02/95] quarter page art:0001381-B The adjusting levers for the luggage rack [FV39900(ALL)11/94] Leave the rear crossbar in its original back position when you are not using it to hold luggage to reduce aerodynamic drag and improve fuel economy. 164 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV40000(ALL)11/94] The Second Seats [FV40100(ALL)11/94] Your vehicle is equipped with split-folding second seats. One or both second seatbacks can be folded down to provide additional cargo space. [FV40200(ALL)02/95] To lower the seatback: [FV40300(ALL)02/95] 1. Lift the seatback release handle on the upper outboard corner of the seatback. [FV40400(ALL)02/95] 2. Fold the seatback forward until it rests on the cushion. *[FV40500(ALL)11/94] To raise the seatback: [FV40700(ALL)02/95] 1. Lift the seatback rearward until it is in the upright position. Push the center of the seat until you hear it latch. *[FV40750(ALL)11/94] 2. Make sure the seatback is locked in position by pushing forward and backward on it. *[FV40775(ALL)11/94] RWARNING If you do not securely latch the seatback in the upright position, the seatback or objects could be thrown forward during a sudden stop or collision, possibly injuring you or other passengers. 165 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV40800(ALL)11/94] The Third Seat [FV40900(ALL)04/95] The third seat faces the back of the wagon. For height and weight limits, see the label on the seat cushion. When the seat is down, the back part of your wagon has a flat surface for carrying cargo. [FV41000(ALL)03/92] To open up the seat: [FV41100(ALL)04/95] 1. Unlock the floor panel with the key. [FV41200(ALL)11/94] 2. Use the handle to fold the floor panel toward the front of the car. [FV41250(ALL)04/95] half page art:0001409-C Opening the third seat in the rear of the wagon 166 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV41270(ALL)04/95] half page art:0000442-B The third seat in a wagon [FV41350(ALL)04/95] 3. Remove the cargo cover. The cargo cover must be removed or the seatback cannot be locked in the upright position. [FV41450(ALL)11/94] 4. Lift the remote latch release on the left side of the well and fold the remaining floor panel toward the front of the car until it latches. Make sure the seatback is locked in the upright position by pushing forward and backward on it. 167 File:fcfvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:39:11 1995 [FV41500(ALL)03/92] To close the seat: [FV41600(ALL)02/95] 1. Ensure that the third row safety belts are fully stowed, and belts located in notches. [FV41700(ALL)11/94] 2. Lift the remote latch release and push the seat down until it latches. [FV41800(ALL)04/95] 3. Pull up on the handle and push the floor panel into place. [FV41850(ALL)11/94] RWARNING Be sure to keep the floor panel closed and locked at all times. If you do not, unattended children could possibly become trapped inside. In addition, loose items could be thrown around in a collision and possibly injure someone. 168 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 [AS10350(ALL)08/95] full page art:0001446-B Electronic Sound Systems Stereo Radio 169 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 [AS10401(ALL)08/95] full page art:0001447-B Stereo Radio with Cassette 170 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 [AS10550(ALL)08/95] full page art:0001448-B Stereo Cassette with CD-DJ 171 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 [AS10600(ALL)04/95] Stereo and Stereo Cassette Radios *[AS10650(ALL)02/95] *[AS10700(ALL)02/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio [AS10750(ALL)04/95] Press the “VOL PUSH ON” button to turn the radio on. Press again to turn off. *[AS10800(ALL)01/95] How to adjust the volume [AS10825(ALL)02/95] Turn the “VOL PUSH ON” knob to the right to increase the volume and to the left to decrease the volume. Dots illuminate in the display to show relative volume level. [AS10840(ALL)04/95] NOTE: If the volume is set above a certain level when the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back to a “nominal” listening level when the ignition is turned back on. However, if the radio power is turned off with the “VOL PUSH ON” button, the volume will not change and will remain at the level set when the radio is turned back on. *[AS11000(ALL)02/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band [AS11125(ALL)04/95] Press the “AM” or “FM” button to select the desired frequency band or to stop/store cassette tape (when a cassette is playing). Pressing the “FM” button more than once will alternate between FM1 and FM2. These functions are used with the station memory buttons described under How to tune radio stations. How to turn the radio on and off % How to tune radio stations [AS11300(ALL)04/95] There are four ways for you to tune in a particular station. You can manually locate the station using the “TUNE” button, “SEEK” to the station, “SCAN” to the station or select the station by using the memory buttons. These four methods are described below. *[AS11200(ALL)01/95] 172 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 [AS11400(ALL)02/95] [AS11525(ALL)02/95] *[AS11700(ALL)02/95] [AS11825(ALL)02/95] *[AS12200(ALL)01/95] *[AS12325(ALL)04/95] ❑ Using the “TUNE” function You can change the frequency up or down one increment at a time by pressing and releasing either the right (a) or left (b) side of the “TUNE” or “TUNE/DISC” button. To change frequencies quickly, press and hold down either the right or left side of the button. ❑ Using the “SEEK” function Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the next listenable station up the frequency band. Press the left (b) side of the button to select the next listenable station down the frequency band. By pressing and holding the button, listenable stations can be passed over to reach the desired station. ❑ Using the “SCAN” function Pressing the “SCAN” button will begin the scan mode up the frequency band, stopping on each listenable station for approximately five seconds. The band indicator (AM, FM1, FM2) flashes during scan operation. *[AS12340(ALL)02/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled station, press the “SCAN” button again. *[AS12700(ALL)02/95] *[AS12850(ALL)02/95] ❑ Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons Your radio is equipped with 6 station memory buttons. These buttons can be used to select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12 FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2). 173 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 [AS12900(ALL)02/95] Follow the steps below to set these buttons to the desired frequencies: *[AS13025(ALL)03/95] *[AS13200(ALL)02/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency. 2. Press one of the memory buttons and hold the button until the sound returns. That station is now held in memory on that button. *[AS13300(ALL)02/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory preset button you want to set. [AS13510(ALL)04/95] ❑ Using the Radio Set feature [AS13515(ALL)04/95] With Radio set, you can automatically set strong stations into your memory buttons. AM, FM1 and FM2 will be set sequentially. [AS13545(ALL)04/95] Turn the radio off with the “VOL PUSH ON” knob. Press and hold the “SCAN” button and turn the radio on by pressing the “VOL PUSH ON” knob. Continue holding the “SCAN” button until “RAD” is shown in the display. [AS13550(ALL)04/95] NOTE: If there are less than six strong stations in the frequency band, the remaining unfilled buttons will store the last strong station detected on the band. *[AS13560(ALL)04/95] After all stations have been filled, the radio will begin playing the station stored on memory button 1. *[AS13600(ALL)02/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speaker output of your radio *[AS13800(ALL)02/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response Press the right (a) side of the “BASS” button to increase bass (more “lows”); press the left (b) side of the “BASS” button to decrease bass (less “lows”). [AS13925(ALL)02/95] 174 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 *[AS14000(ALL)02/95] [AS14125(ALL)02/95] *[AS14400(ALL)02/95] [AS14525(ALL)04/95] *[AS14600(ALL)02/95] [AS14725(ALL)04/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response Press the right (a) side of the “TREB” button to increase treble (more “highs”); press the left (b) side of the “TREB” button to decrease treble (less “highs”). ❑ Adjusting speaker balance Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the right and left speakers. Press the right (a) side of the “BAL” button to shift the sound to the right speakers, and press the left (b) side to shift the sound to the left speakers. The display will show “BAL” and a dot indicating the balance position. ❑ Adjusting speaker fader Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the front and rear speakers. Press the right (a) side of the “FADE” button to shift the sound to the front speakers, and press the left (b) side to shift the sound to the rear speakers. The display will show “FADE” and a dot indicating the fade position. [AS14800(ALL)04/95] Using the Power Antenna (If equipped) *[AS14850(ALL)02/95] The power antenna will automatically rise when your radio is turned on and the ignition is in the ON or ACC position. It will lower when either the radio or the ignition is turned off. *[AS14900(ALL)02/95] *[AS14950(ALL)02/95] Power antenna maintenance and care ❑ Never drive your vehicle through a car wash with the power antenna mast extended. This can cause damage to the antenna mast, which is not covered under warranty. Turn off your radio and/or the vehicle. This will automatically retract the antenna. 175 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 *[AS15000(ALL)02/95] ❑ If your power antenna mast ever becomes *[AS15050(ALL)02/95] ❑ Occasionally, the power antenna mast should *[AS15100(ALL)02/95] *[AS15150(ALL)02/95] Common Radio Reception Conditions *[AS15200(ALL)04/95] *[AS15250(ALL)02/95] 1. *[AS15300(ALL)04/95] *[AS15350(ALL)02/95] 2. % damaged, the mast may not extend or retract properly which might limit reception performance. In this case, it is not necessary to replace the entire power antenna assembly. A replacement mast can be obtained from your dealership for a nominal fee. be wiped clean with mild soap and water or denatured alcohol. This prevents debris from accumulating on the mast which can cause excessive wear and decrease the power antenna life. Never use petroleum-based products to clean your antenna mast. Several conditions prevent FM reception from being completely clear and noise-free, such as the following: Distance/Strength The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance the signal must travel. The listenable range of an average FM signal is approximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyond this distance, the radio is operating in a fringe area and the signal becomes weaker. Terrain The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) of the area over which the signal travels may prevent the FM signal from being noise-free. 176 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 *[AS15400(ALL)04/95] *[AS15450(ALL)02/95] 3. Rounded off frequencies *[AS15600(ALL)02/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape Player [AS15700(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to use the cassette tape player. [AS15800(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Adjust the volume, treble, bass, balance and fade controls in the same manner as for radio stations. *[AS15900(ALL)02/95] How to insert a tape [AS16025(ALL)04/95] Your cassette player is equipped with power loading. Once you insert a tape and push slightly (with the open edge to the right), the loading mechanism draws the tape the rest of the way in and play will begin after a momentary tape tightening process. Display indicates “TAPE” while tape is playing. If the “TAPE” button is pressed when the cassette tape player is empty, “NO” and “TAPE” will flash in the display and radio play will continue. [AS16050(ALL)02/95] NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with the ignition on whether the radio is on or off. However, if the radio is off, the cassette tape will be loaded and stored. *[AS16300(ALL)02/95] *[AS16350(ALL)02/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape Some FM radio stations advertise a “rounded-off” frequency which is not the frequency they actually broadcast on. For example, a radio station that is assigned a frequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99” even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FM broadcast frequency. There are four ways to quickly locate a desired selection on the tape. You can use the fast forward, rewind, “SEEK” or “SCAN” function. Following are brief descriptions of each. 177 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 *[AS16400(ALL)02/95] ❑ Fast forwarding the tape To fast forward the tape, press the “FF” button. The radio will automatically begin playing until fast forward is manually stopped (by pressing the “TAPE”, “EJ”, “REW” or “FF” button) or the end of the tape is reached. The display will show a flashing X to indicate fast forward. At the end of the tape, the direction automatically reverses and plays the other side of the tape. [AS16525(ALL)04/95] *[AS16535(ALL)01/95] *[AS16600(ALL)02/95] ❑ Rewinding the tape To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button. The radio will automatically begin playing until rewind is manually stopped (by pressing the “TAPE”, “EJ”, “REW” or “FF” button) or the beginning of the tape is reached. The display will show a flashing X to indicate rewind. [AS16725(ALL)04/95] *[AS17000(ALL)01/95] ❑ Using the “SEEK” function with your cassette tape player While in the tape mode, press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button to seek forward to the next selection on the tape (display indicates “SEEK”). Press the left (b) side to seek the previous tape selection. [AS17125(ALL)04/95] *[AS17135(ALL)03/95] NOTE: If you want to restart a currently playing tape selection, press the left (b) side of the “SEEK” button after approximately three seconds into the current selection. 178 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 *[AS17200(ALL)01/95] ❑ Using the “SCAN” function with your cassette tape player [AS17325(ALL)02/95] Press the “SCAN” button to begin the forward scan mode on the tape currently playing, stopping on each tape selection for approximately an eight-second sampling (display flashes “SCAN”). [AS17345(ALL)04/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled tape selection press “SCAN” a second time. [AS17348(ALL)02/95] How to change the side of the tape being played [AS17350(ALL)02/95] The alternate side of the tape can be selected at any time by pressing the “SIDE 1-2” button. *[AS17400(ALL)02/95] How to eject the tape [AS17525(ALL)04/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the “EJ” button. The radio will resume playing if the power is on. The tape cartridge can be ejected with radio power (and/or ignition) on or off. *[AS17550(ALL)01/95] How to store the tape [AS17575(ALL)04/95] Press the “AM” or “FM” button (or “CD”, if equipped) to stop the tape player and resume radio play (or CD-DJ). *[AS17600(ALL)02/95] *[AS17700(ALL)02/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature *[AS17825(ALL)04/95] Push the k button to activate Dolby B Noise Reduction. Push again to deactivate. NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured under license from Dolby Labs Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. 179 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 *[AS18260(ALL)01/95] *[AS18280(ALL)01/95] [AS18325(ALL)04/95] [AS18330(ALL)04/95] [AS18350(ALL)12/95] Tape error messages Your cassette tape player is equipped to diagnose certain problems you may experience. Error codes are as follows: TD E1 — Possible problem tape cartridge. The cassette player will automatically eject the tape. Insert the tape again. If the same error code appears in the display, try a different tape. If the problem persists, refer the problem to qualified personnel for service. TD E2 — Radio cannot eject tape. If tape is not ejected when the “EJ” button is pressed, refer the problem to qualified personnel for service. TD E3 — Radio cannot insert tape properly. The cassette player will automatically eject the tape. Insert tape again. If the same error code appears in the display, try a different tape. If the problem persists, refer the problem to qualified personnel for service. *[AS18500(ALL)02/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and Tapes *[AS18600(ALL)02/95] In order to keep your cassette tape player performing the way it was meant to, read and follow these simple precautions: *[AS18700(ALL)02/95] ❑ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to *[AS18800(ALL)02/95] ❑ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or *[AS18900(ALL)02/95] ❑ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct clean the tape player head after 10-12 hours of play will help maintain the best playback sound and proper tape operation. less should be used. Tapes longer than 90 minutes are thinner and subject to breakage or may jam the tape player mechanism. sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or cold. If they are exposed to extreme conditions, allow them to reach a moderate temperature before playing. 180 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 *[AS19000(ALL)02/95] ❑ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it *[AS19100(ALL)01/95] ❑ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become *[AS19200(ALL)01/95] ❑ Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape before playing by putting your finger or a pencil into one of the holes and turning the hub until the tape is tight. lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose label material before inserting cassette. player. High heat in the vehicle can cause the cassette to warp. % Ford 6-CD Changer [AS29401(ALL)02/95] The Ford 6-CD Changer is in the left of the trunk or the right of the cargo area. It is controlled by the audio system buttons. *[AS29450(ALL)02/95] Loading Instructions [AS29500(ALL)04/95] 1. *[AS29351(ALL)02/95] Open the cover door. Open Compact Disc Changer trunk unit by sliding door to the front (sedan) or rear (wagon) (Figure 1). [AS29550(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0001464-A Figure 1 [AS29601(ALL)02/95] 2. Press the orange Eject button to eject the disc “magazine” (holds 6 discs) (Figure 2). 181 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 [AS29650(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0001465-A Figure 2 [AS29701(ALL)02/95] 3. Load discs into the disc magazine slots (numbered 1 through 6 on the window) one at a time with labeled surfaces upward, starting with bottom slot number 1 (Figure 3). [AS29750(ALL)08/95] one third page art:0001466-B Figure 3 To remove a compact disc from the disc magazine, slide the corresponding lever on the opposite side of the magazine window. The disc will partially eject. [AS29775(ALL)02/95] 182 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 [AS29800(ALL)02/95] 4. Insert loaded disc magazine into changer unit with the arrow on top of the disc magazine pointing toward the changer (Figure 4). Make sure magazine is fully inserted into changer. [AS29850(ALL)04/95] quarter page art:0001467-A Figure 4 [AS29950(ALL)02/95] 5. Close unit by sliding changer panel door to the rear (sedan) or front (wagon). [AS30001(ALL)02/95] The Compact Disc Changer unit is now ready to play using the controls of your audio system. *[AS30050(ALL)02/95] How to Operate the Ford 6-CD Changer Using the Controls on the Radio [AS30101(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford 6-CD Changer System, you can operate it through the controls of your audio system. *[AS30150(ALL)02/95] Several of the controls on the radio operate in the same manner in CD mode as they do in radio or cassette mode: turning the power on, volume control and adjusting the bass, treble, speaker balance or fade. *[AS30201(ALL)02/95] *[AS30250(ALL)02/95] How to begin CD Changer play NOTE: Radio power must be on to operate the Compact Disc Changer. 183 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 [AS30301(ALL)04/95] Push the “CD” button to begin CD play. If the disc magazine has just been installed, the CD Changer will automatically begin playing the first track (selection) of the first disc loaded in the unit. After that, the CD Changer will start on the disc and track where it was stopped. The display will indicate “CD-##” for disc number, then display “TR-##” for track number, then “DD-TT” for disc number and track number. [AS30325(ALL)04/95] If the CD Changer is empty, “NO” and “CD” will flash in the display and radio play will continue. *[AS30350(ALL)02/95] How to change the disc being played [AS30401(ALL)02/95] When in the CD mode, you can change discs by pressing the right (a) side of the “TUNE/DISC” button (to select the next disc) or the left (b) side of the “TUNE/DISC” button (to select the previous disc). Play will begin on the first track of the selected disc. *[AS30450(ALL)02/95] When either side of the button is pressed and held, the CD changer will continue fast-forwarding or reversing through the discs in the disc magazine. During these functions, the display will indicate the disc number. *[AS30501(ALL)02/95] *[AS30550(ALL)02/95] How to change the track being played *[AS30601(ALL)02/95] Press the left (b) side of the SEEK button to seek in reverse to the previous track on the current disc. If a selection has been playing for three seconds or more and you press the left (b) side of the SEEK button, the CD Changer will replay that selection from the beginning. Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button to seek forward to the next track of current disc. After the last track has been completed, the CD player automatically wraps back to the first track of the current disc. 184 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 [AS30625(ALL)04/95] Using fast forward or reverse [AS30651(ALL)04/95] To quickly search for a particular point in a selection, press and hold the “FF” or “REW” button. Find the desired point by watching the elapsed playing time in the display or listening to the sound, then release the button. *[AS30800(ALL)02/95] *[AS30851(ALL)02/95] Operating the Shuffle feature [AS30900(ALL)02/95] Press the “SHUFFLE” button to turn on, press it again to turn off. When on, the display will indicate “SHUF” then the disc and track number (dd-tt). *[AS30951(ALL)02/95] *[AS31000(ALL)02/95] Operating the “SCAN” function *[AS31051(ALL)02/95] Operating the Shuffle and Scan features simultaneously *[AS31101(ALL)02/95] Both the shuffle and scan features can be activated simultaneously. In this mode, the player will randomly pick a selection and play the first eight seconds. This process is continued until either the “SCAN” button or “SHUFFLE” button is pressed a second time. *[AS31110(ALL)04/95] *[AS31120(ALL)04/95] Operating the CD Compression feature The shuffle feature on your CD player allows you to listen to your disc selections in a different order. When this feature is activated, your CD player will randomly select and play tracks on the disc. Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scan mode. The CD player will begin scanning the disc, stopping on each listenable track for approximately an eight second sampling. This continues until you press the “SCAN” button a second time. The compression feature will bring soft and loud passages closer together for a more consistent listening level. 185 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 [AS31130(ALL)04/95] To turn the compression on, press the “COMP” button. When the compression feature is activated, the display will indicate “C”. Press again to deactivate. *[AS31150(ALL)02/95] How to stop CD play [AS31200(ALL)04/95] While in CD Changer mode, press the “AM” or “FM” button to stop CD play and resume radio play. Loading a cassette into the cassette deck (or pressing “TAPE” if a cassette is already loaded) will stop CD play and begin cassette play. % How To Take Care of and Clean Your CD Player and Discs *[AS32312(ALL)03/95] To ensure the continued performance of your Ford Compact Disc Player, carefully read the following precautions: *[AS32314(ALL)03/95] ❑ Always handle the disc by its edge. Never *[AS32316(ALL)04/95] ❑ Before playing, inspect the disc for any *[AS32310(ALL)03/95] touch the playing surface. contamination. If needed, clean the disc with an approved disc cleaner, such as the DiscwasherH Compact Disc Cleaner or the Allsop 3H Compact Disc Cleaner, by wiping from the center out to the edges. Do not use a circular motion to clean. 186 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 *[AS32318(ALL)03/95] ❑ Do not clean discs with solvents such as *[AS32320(ALL)03/95] ❑ Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or *[AS32322(ALL)03/95] *[AS32324(ALL)03/95] ❑ After playing, store the disc in its case. ❑ If a disc has already been inserted, do not try *[AS32326(ALL)03/95] ❑ Do not insert anything other than a disc into *[AS32328(ALL)03/95] CAUTION: The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard as the laser beam used in this compact disc player is harmful to the eyes. Do not attempt to disassemble the case. Refer servicing to qualified personnel only. benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray intended for analog records. heat sources such as defroster and floor heating ducts. Do not leave any discs in a parked car in direct sunlight where there may be a considerable rise in temperature or damage may result. to insert another disc. Doing so may damage the disc player. the disc player. 187 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 *[AS32330(ALL)03/95] Common Operating Conditions of Your CD Player *[AS32332(ALL)03/95] The following information is designed to help you recognize typical situations that could be mistakenly interpreted as mechanical malfunctions of the disc player. *[AS32336(ALL)03/95] ❑ The disc is inserted with the label surface *[AS32338(ALL)03/95] *[AS32340(ALL)04/95] ❑ The disc is dusty or defective. ❑ The player’s internal temperature is above *[AS32342(ALL)03/95] ❑ Different manufacturers of compact discs may downward. 140˚F (60˚C). Allow the player to cool off before operating. produce discs with different dimensions or tolerances, some of which may not be within industry standards or in accordance with the CD format. Because of this, a new disc that is free of dust and scratches could be defective and may not play on your Ford Compact Disc Player. 188 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 *[AS32344(ALL)03/95] If play does not begin after the CD button is pushed: *[AS32345(ALL)03/95] ❑ The radio is not on. ❑ The disc magazine is not fully seated in [AS32346(ALL)02/95] changer. *[AS32348(ALL)03/95] ❑ Moisture may have condensed on the lenses *[AS32350(ALL)03/95] *[AS32352(ALL)03/95] If the sound skips: *[AS32400(ALL)02/95] CD Error Messages [AS32500(ALL)02/95] Your system is equipped to diagnose certain problems you may experience. The displayed error codes are: [AS32600(ALL)02/95] NO then CD — Empty slot or magazine, mechanical error, disc(s) unreadable, or mechanism focus error. Check all discs in the magazine for scratches and proper insertion. If problem persists, refer problem to qualified personnel for service. [AS32700(ALL)02/95] NO then DJ — CD Changer not connected or not communicating to audio system. Refer problem to qualified personnel for service. [AS32800(ALL)04/95] TOO then HOT — The changer’s internal temperature is above 140˚F (60˚C). Allow the player to cool before operating. within the unit. If this occurs, remove the CD magazine and wait approximately an hour until the moisture evaporates. ❑ Badly scratched discs or extremely rough roads will cause the sound to skip. Skipping will not damage the disc player or scratch the discs. 189 File:fcass.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:30:38 1995 % *[AS37000(ALL)01/95] *[AS37050(ALL)07/90] *[AS37100(ALL)03/95] *[AS37150(ALL)07/90] *[AS37200(ALL)01/95] Important Warranty and Service Information ❑ Warranty Your sound system is warranted for three years or 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichever comes first. Consult your vehicle warranty booklet for further information. Ask your dealer for a copy of this limited warranty. ❑ Service At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audio systems with a comprehensive service and repair program. If anything should go wrong with your Ford audio system, return to your dealer for service. There is a nationwide network of qualified Ford authorized repair centers to assist you. 190 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 Driving Your Sable *[DR00300(ALL)11/94] Your vehicle will have one of the following types of transaxles: *[DR00500(ALL)11/94] ❑ an automatic overdrive transaxle, or ❑ an automatic overdrive transaxle with [DR00510(ALL)02/95] Overdrive Off (O/D OFF) switch *[DR00700(ALL)11/94] If you are not sure which transaxle your vehicle has, talk to your dealer. *[DR00800(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with an Electronic Powertrain Control Module that limits engine and/or vehicle speeds with a cut-out mode to promote durability. [DR03510(ALL)04/95] Driving with an Automatic Overdrive Transaxle (Column Gearshift without O/D OFF Switch) *[DR03600(ALL)04/95] % Your automatic overdrive transaxle provides fully automatic operation in either j (Overdrive) or D (Drive). Driving with the shift selector in j (Overdrive) gives the best fuel economy for normal driving conditions. For manual control, start in 1 (First) and then shift manually. 191 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 *[DR03800(ALL)01/95] *[DR04001(ALL)01/95] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear RWARNING Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift from position to position. If you do not hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. *[DR04050(ALL)03/95] *[DR04101(ALL)01/95] *[DR04150(ALL)01/95] *[DR04201(ALL)01/95] % [DR04250(ALL)04/95] * To operate: *[DR04300(ALL)01/95] 1. Turn the engine off and remove the ignition key. [DR04350(ALL)11/94] 2. Reinsert the ignition key and turn clockwise to the first position (OFF). [DR04400(ALL)11/94] 3. Depress the brake pedal, move the gearshift lever to N (Neutral) and start the engine. 1. Start the engine. 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 3. Move the gearshift lever out of P (Park). Your vehicle is equipped with a Brake Shift Interlock safety feature. This feature prevents the gearshift from being moved from the P (Park) position until the brake pedal is depressed. This feature is active when the ignition is in the ON position. If the gearshift lever CANNOT be moved from P (Park) with the brake pedal depressed: 192 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 *[DR04451(ALL)03/95] RWARNING If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the alternate procedure described above, it is possible that a fuse has blown and that your brakelamps may also not be functional. Please refer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Vehicle in this Owner Guide for instructions on checking and replacing fuses. DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL YOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPS ARE WORKING. *[DR04501(ALL)11/94] *[DR04550(ALL)04/95] % Using a column-mounted gearshift If your gearshift is on the column, you can use any of the following positions: [DR04601(ALL)11/94] one third page art:0000491-E The column-mounted gearshift *[DR04650(ALL)01/95] Once you place the gearshift securely into position, gradually release the brake pedal and use the accelerator as necessary. 193 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 *[DR05100(ALL)01/95] *[DR05200(ALL)02/95] R (Reverse) *[DR05250(ALL)01/95] *[DR05275(ALL)01/95] N (Neutral) *[DR05300(ALL)01/95] % [DR05400(ALL)04/95] * Driving [DR05500(ALL)04/95] [DR05600(ALL)04/95] With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position, the vehicle will move backward. You should always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R (Reverse). With the gearshift in the N (Neutral) position, the vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position. When to use j (Overdrive) j (Overdrive) is the usual driving position for an automatic overdrive transaxle. It works the same way D (Drive) works, automatically upshifting or downshifting as the vehicle speeds or slows. However, j (Overdrive) also shifts into a fourth gear — an overdrive gear — when your vehicle cruises at a consistent speed for any length of time. This fourth gear will increase your fuel economy when you travel at cruising speeds. *[DR05800(ALL)03/93] When to use D (Drive) [DR06000(ALL)04/95] D (Drive) eliminates the excessive shifting between third and fourth gears that your vehicle sometimes does when you are traveling through hilly terrain in j (Overdrive). It also provides more engine braking than j(Overdrive) for descending hills or city driving. 194 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 *[DR06100(ALL)04/95] *[DR06200(ALL)11/94] When to use 1 (First) *[DR06220(ALL)11/94] The automatic transaxle will shift to the proper gear to ascend any grade without any need to shift to 1 (First). [DR06300(ALL)04/95] Do not go faster than 38 mph (61 km/h) in this gear. You can upshift from 1 (First) to D (Drive) or from 1 (First) to j (Overdrive) at any speed. *[DR06400(ALL)01/95] *[DR06500(ALL)11/94] P (Park) *[DR06600(ALL)01/95] Use 1 (First) when added engine braking is desired when descending steep hills. Always come to a complete stop before you shift into P (Park). Make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). This locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from rotating. RWARNING Do not use the P (Park) position in place of the parking brake. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). *[DR06625(ALL)03/95] Always turn off the ignition whenever you leave your vehicle. Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running. *[DR06650(ALL)01/95] If you do not take these precautions, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. [DR06700(ALL)11/94] You can tell a column-mounted gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) if you cannot move it without pulling it toward you and rotating it downward. 195 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 [DR06705(ALL)04/95] Driving with an Automatic Overdrive Transaxle (Column or Console Gearshift with O/D OFF Switch) [DR06710(ALL)02/95] Your automatic overdrive transaxle provides fully automatic operation in either D (Overdrive) or with the O/D OFF Switch depressed. Driving with the shift selector in D (Overdrive) gives the best fuel economy for normal driving conditions. For manual control, start in 1 (First) and then shift manually. *[DR06730(ALL)01/95] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear [DR06735(ALL)04/95] You must push in the thumb button to move the console-mounted gearshift to the position you choose. [DR06740(ALL)02/95] To move the gearshift out of P (Park), the ignition must be turned from the locked position to either the OFF or the ON position. *[DR06745(ALL)03/95] *[DR06750(ALL)01/95] *[DR06755(ALL)01/95] *[DR06760(ALL)01/95] To operate: 1. Start the engine. 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 3. Move the gearshift lever out of P (Park). 196 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 % Your vehicle is equipped with a Brake Shift Interlock safety feature. This feature prevents the gearshift from being moved from the P (Park) position until the brake pedal is depressed. This feature is active when the ignition is in the ON position. If the gearshift lever CANNOT be moved from P (Park) with the brake pedal depressed: *[DR06770(ALL)01/95] 1. Turn the engine off and remove the ignition key. [DR06775(ALL)11/94] 2. Reinsert the ignition key and turn clockwise to the first position (OFF). [DR06780(ALL)11/94] 3. Depress the brake pedal, move the gearshift lever to N (Neutral) and start the engine. *[DR06765(ALL)04/95] *[DR06783(ALL)03/95] RWARNING If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the alternate procedure described above, it is possible that a fuse has blown and that your brakelamps may also not be functional. Please refer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Vehicle in this Owner Guide for instructions on checking and replacing fuses. DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL YOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPS ARE WORKING. 197 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 [DR06785(ALL)04/95] Using the gearshift *[DR06787(ALL)04/95] If your gearshift is on the column, you can use any of the following positions: [DR06788(ALL)04/95] half page art:0001435-A The column-mounted gearshift 198 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 [DR06789(ALL)04/95] If your gearshift is on the console, you can use any of the following positions: [DR06790(ALL)04/95] half page art:0001028-D The console-mounted gearshift *[DR06791(ALL)04/95] The console-mounted gearshift will lock when you turn the key to the LOCK position. When the gearshift is in any position except P (Park), the ignition key cannot be turned to LOCK or removed from the steering column. TO REMOVE THE KEY, the gearshift lever must be in P (Park). *[DR06793(ALL)11/94] Once the gearshift is secure in the desired position, release the brake pedal and use the accelerator as necessary. *[DR06795(ALL)01/95] *[DR06800(ALL)02/95] R (Reverse) With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position, the vehicle will move backward. You should always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R (Reverse). 199 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 *[DR06802(ALL)01/95] *[DR06804(ALL)01/95] N (Neutral) *[DR06805(ALL)01/95] % [DR06825(ALL)01/95] * Driving [DR06830(ALL)11/94] D (Overdrive) is the usual driving position for an automatic overdrive transaxle. It automatically upshifts or downshifts as the vehicle speeds or slows. [DR06835(ALL)11/94] However, D (Overdrive) also shifts into a fourth gear — an overdrive gear — when your vehicle cruises at a consistent speed for any length of time. This fourth gear will increase your fuel economy when you travel at cruising speeds. [DR07025(ALL)04/95] When to use D (O/D OFF) [DR07050(ALL)04/95] You will notice that there is only one drive position on your gearshift indicator (instead of Drive and Overdrive). However, you will find a switch labeled O/D located on the gearshift lever. Push in the switch and the O/D OFF light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. With the O/D OFF light illuminated, the transaxle will operate in first, second and third gears and will not shift into fourth gear. Operating in D (O/D OFF) eliminates the excessive shifting between third and fourth gears that your vehicle sometimes does when you are traveling through hilly terrain in D (Overdrive). It also provides more engine braking than D (Overdrive) for descending hills or city driving. [DR07075(ALL)04/95] To return the transaxle to the normal Overdrive operation, press the O/D OFF switch again. Use this switch to select Overdrive or D (O/D OFF) whenever you drive your vehicle. With the gearshift in the N (Neutral) position, the vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position. When to use D (Overdrive) 200 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 [DR08050(ALL)11/94] NOTE: If the O/D OFF indicator light is flashing on and off repeatedly when the vehicle is started or does not come on when the O/D OFF switch is pushed, it means that there is a transaxle electronic system malfunction. You should contact your dealer as soon as possible or damage to the transaxle could occur. *[DR08075(ALL)02/95] The transaxle will be in the “overdrive on” mode when the vehicle is started even if the O/D OFF mode was selected when the vehicle was last shut off. *[DR09025(ALL)01/95] When to use 2 (Second) Use Second for start-up on slippery roads or to give you more engine braking to slow your vehicle on downgrades. [DR09050(ALL)11/94] *[DR09075(ALL)04/95] *[DR10025(ALL)11/94] *[DR10050(ALL)11/94] [DR10075(ALL)11/94] When to use 1 (First) Use 1 (First) when added engine braking is desired when descending steep hills. The automatic transaxle will shift to the proper gear to ascend any grade without any need to shift to 1 (First). Do not go faster than 38 mph (61 km/h) in this gear. You can upshift from 1 (First) to D (Overdrive) at any speed. *[DR10125(ALL)01/95] *[DR10150(ALL)11/94] P (Park) [DR10160(ALL)04/95] If your vehicle has a console mounted gearshift, the gearshift indicator in the cluster is illuminated in P (Park) only when the gearshift button is released. Always come to a complete stop before you shift into P (Park). Make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). This locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from rotating. 201 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 *[DR10175(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Do not use the P (Park) position in place of the parking brake. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). *[DR10225(ALL)03/95] Always turn off the ignition whenever you leave your vehicle. Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running. *[DR10250(ALL)01/95] If you do not take these precautions, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. [DR10275(ALL)11/94] You can tell a console-mounted gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) if you cannot move it without pushing in the thumb button. *[DR15600(ALL)01/95] % [DR15800(ALL)01/95] * Steering Your Vehicle [DR15970(ALL)11/94] *[DR16100(ALL)04/95] % Your vehicle comes with power steering. Power steering uses energy from the engine to help steer your vehicle. Your vehicle has variable-assist steering. This system provides light power steering efforts for parking and heavier power steering efforts for highway driving. If you notice that the power steering effort does not change according to the speed you are traveling, or if the power steering system is not working, have the system checked. If the amount of effort needed to steer your vehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system checked. If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort. 202 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 *[DR16150(ALL)01/95] Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or left for more than five seconds if the engine is running. This can damage the power steering pump. *[DR16200(ALL)03/95] % [DR16300(ALL)01/95] * Brakes Applying the Brakes [DR16450(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle may have four-wheel power anti-lock disc brakes which adjust automatically through everyday use. [DR16500(ALL)11/94] Some models have power front disc brakes and rear drum brakes which automatically adjust as the brake pads and linings wear down. [DR16700(ALL)04/95] If your vehicle does not have anti-lock brakes, apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the “squeeze” technique — push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing force. This allows the wheels to continue to roll while you are slowing down, which lets you steer properly. *[DR16800(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle does not have anti-lock brakes, extreme braking can make the wheels lock and slide, causing you to lose control of the steering. If the wheels lock, release the brake pedal and repeat the “squeeze” technique. *[DR16900(ALL)08/95] Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal; you will wear out the linings and increase your vehicle’s stopping distance. Brake rotor damage may also eventually occur. *[DR17000(ALL)03/95] NOTE: If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear and do not apply your brakes continuously. If you apply your brakes continuously, they may overheat and become less effective. 203 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 % Occasional brake squeal during light to moderate stops does not affect the function of the brake system and is normal. However, if the squeal becomes louder or more frequent, have your brakes inspected by your dealer or a qualified service technician. [DR17350(ALL)02/95] Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (If equipped) [DR17450(ALL)11/94] If your vehicle is equipped with the anti-lock brake system (ABS), the wheels will not lock and slide when you press down hard on the brake pedal. The ABS automatically starts releasing and reapplying the front brakes independently and the rear brakes together whenever your vehicle’s wheels start to lock. When this happens, you will feel the brake pedal pulsate. This is an indication that the ABS is working correctly and is normal. *[DR17500(ALL)10/93] If the brake pedal is applied while the vehicle is driven over uneven road surfaces, the ABS may cycle and the driver may sense a pulsation in the brake pedal, accompanied by a slight up and down movement of the pedal height and a clicking sound. This may also happen when driving on an inclined surface such as a driveway while making a sharp turn. This is a normal condition. [DR17600(ALL)04/95] Each time you turn the ignition key to the ON position, the ABS will function through one test cycle. When this happens, the ABS light will come on for up to five seconds. If the light stays on longer than five seconds, shut off the engine and restart. If it remains on, it means the ABS is disabled and should be serviced immediately to restore the benefits of the anti-lock feature. Normal braking is not affected unless the red BRAKE system warning light is also lit. *[DR17100(ALL)03/95] 204 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 [DR17650(ALL)11/94] ABS has self-check capabilities. As described above, the system turns on the ABS light each time you start your engine. After the engine is started and the ABS light turns off, the system performs another test the first time the vehicle reaches 4-9 mph (6-15 km/h). The system turns on the ABS pump motor for approximately 1/2 second. At this time, a mechanical noise may be heard. This is a normal part of the self-check feature. If a malfunction is found during this check the ABS light will come on. [DR17675(ALL)02/95] Vehicles with ABS are identified with a label on the front door pillar. *[DR17700(ALL)12/93] Ford Motor Company has not found any negative effects of mobile radio transmitting equipment installed on vehicles with the ABS system providing that the radio is installed according to the radio manufacturer’s instructions. However, if you have had a mobile radio transmitter installed and the check ABS light comes on (at any time other than immediately after turning the key to the ON position) have your mobile radio dealer inspect the radio installation. Also, if the ABS system is activated other than during maximum braking, have your mobile radio installation checked. *[DR17800(ALL)03/95] *[DR17900(ALL)01/95] Parking Brake [DR18000(ALL)01/95] This brake is suspended just below the bottom of the instrument panel to the left of the brake pedal. % The parking brake should be used whenever you park your vehicle. 205 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 [DR18300(ALL)11/94] one third page art:0001391-A The parking brake and parking brake release *[DR18420(ALL)03/95] RWARNING Do not use the gearshift in place of the parking brake. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). *[DR18700(ALL)01/95] RWARNING If the parking brake is fully released, but the Brake Warning Light remains on, have the brakes checked immediately. They may not be working properly. *[DR18750(ALL)01/95] RWARNING To avoid personal injury when manually releasing the parking brake, make sure the gearshift selector is securely latched in P (Park) and do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle. 206 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 *[DR19000(ALL)01/95] The parking brake is not designed to stop a moving vehicle, but you can use the parking brake to stop your vehicle in an emergency if the normal brakes fail. However, since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes, the stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected. *[DR19050(ALL)03/95] Always check the Brake Warning Light each time you start your engine. Driving with the parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear out quickly and will reduce the fuel economy. *[DR19100(ALL)01/95] % [DR19200(ALL)01/95] * *[DR19300(ALL)03/95] Driving Under Special Conditions Tips for Safe Driving As with any new vehicle, yours may drive and handle differently from your previous vehicle. Use care until you become accustomed to its various features and driving characteristics. *[DR19400(ALL)03/95] Operate your vehicle within reasonable limits. Sudden acceleration, deceleration, turning, or combinations of these maneuvers can cause a vehicle to behave differently than anticipated. *[DR19750(ALL)01/95] % [DR19800(ALL)01/95] * *[DR19900(ALL)03/95] Driving in Bad Weather *[DR20100(ALL)03/95] ❑ Do not quickly move the steering wheel Slippery roads On some slippery road surfaces, front-wheel drive may provide better acceleration than rear-wheel drive. However, this does not mean that your vehicle can stop any faster or any better than a vehicle with rear-wheel drive. Exercise the same caution while driving on slippery roads with your front-wheel drive vehicle as you would with a rear-wheel drive vehicle. unless necessary. 207 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 *[DR20200(ALL)01/95] *[DR20400(ALL)01/95] *[DR20500(ALL)03/92] ❑ Drive slower than you normally would. ❑ Give your vehicle more distance to stop. ❑ Pump the brake pedal steadily and evenly to *[DR20600(ALL)02/93] *[DR20750(ALL)11/94] ❑ Consider using one of the lower gears. avoid locking your wheels. (Does not apply to vehicles with anti-lock brakes.) RWARNING To avoid skidding and losing control on slippery roads, do not downshift into 1 (First) when you are moving faster than 20 mph (32 km/h). *[DR20775(ALL)03/95] RWARNING If your vehicle has speed control, do not use it on slippery roads. You could lose control of your vehicle and could injure someone. *[DR20850(ALL)01/95] If your vehicle gets stuck (for example, in mud or snow), you may try to “rock” it out of the spot. Shift, in a steady rhythm, between forward and reverse gears. While in each gear, press lightly on the accelerator and release. *[DR20900(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). If you do, the tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. 208 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 *[DR21000(ALL)03/95] By moving the vehicle backward and forward, you may gain enough momentum to move out of the spot. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes. This may overheat the engine, damage the transaxle, or damage the tires. If you are still stuck after a minute or two of rocking, call for a tow truck. *[DR21200(ALL)01/95] *[DR21300(ALL)01/95] High water *[DR21400(ALL)04/94] If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. You may have limited traction or wet brakes, so allow extra stopping distance because your vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual. *[DR21500(ALL)01/95] After you drive through the standing water, apply your brakes gently several times as your vehicle moves slowly. This helps to dry the brakes. *[DR21600(ALL)03/95] *[DR21700(ALL)01/95] Driving With a Heavy Load % % *[DR21800(ALL)01/95] % Do not drive through flooded areas unless you are sure that the water is below the bottom of the wheel rims. There are limits to the amount of weight your vehicle can carry or tow. The total weight of your vehicle, plus the weight of the passengers and cargo, should never be more than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weight that your vehicle carries over the front axle and rear axle should never be more than the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respective axle. You can find your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR on the Safety Compliance Certification Label on the left front door lock facing or on the door latch post pillar. 209 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 *[DR21900(ALL)01/95] The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affect the GVWR or GAWR limitations. Usage of replacement tires with higher weight limit than originals does not increase GVWR or GAWR. Usage of lower capacity replacement tires may lower GVWR and GAWR limitations. *[DR22000(ALL)02/95] RWARNING If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label is exceeded, your vehicle may be damaged or you may lose control and injure someone. *[DR22005(ALL)01/95] *[DR22010(ALL)01/95] Limiting Your Vehicle’s Load *[DR22015(ALL)01/95] To figure the weight of your vehicle’s load, add the weights of: *[DR22020(ALL)01/95] *[DR22025(ALL)01/95] ❑ the driver and passengers ❑ luggage and any other items that you put in *[DR22030(ALL)01/95] *[DR22035(ALL)01/95] ❑ the tongue load of the loaded trailer ❑ the weight of any equipment that has been *[DR22040(ALL)01/95] If you do not know the actual weights of these items, use the following procedure to figure the weight of a load: *[DR22045(ALL)01/95] 1. The load that you add to your vehicle must not exceed the maximum load stated on the Safety Compliance Certification Decal attached to the left front door pillar. your vehicle added to your vehicle since it was delivered to your dealer 210 Weigh your vehicle without the driver, passengers and luggage. You might take your vehicle to a shipping company or an inspection station for trucks. File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 *[DR22050(ALL)01/95] 2. Then weigh your vehicle with the driver, passengers and luggage. *[DR22055(ALL)01/95] 3. Subtract the first reading from the second to figure the total weight of the load. *[DR22060(ALL)01/95] After determining this load, you must also make sure that the total weight of your vehicle, plus the load it carries, is less than its GVWR. Also, make sure that the weight your vehicle carries over each axle is less than the GAWR for the respective axle. *[DR22065(ALL)01/95] You can find the GVWR and GAWR on the Safety Compliance Certification Label on the left front door lock facing or the door latch post pillar. *[DR22070(ALL)01/95] If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargo from your vehicle accordingly. If your vehicle exceeds the GAWR for either axle, shift the load or remove cargo accordingly. 211 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 % Trailer Towing [DR22125(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is classified as a light duty towing vehicle. The amount of weight that you can safely tow depends on the type of engine in your vehicle. See the following charts: *[DR22100(ALL)04/95] [DR22150(ALL)04/95] sixteen pica chart:0000489-H [DR22190(ALL)04/95] fourteen pica chart:0001436-B 212 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 *[DR22200(ALL)01/95] Your vehicle does not come from the factory fully equipped to tow. No towing packages are available through Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealers. *[DR22300(ALL)01/95] Because towing a trailer puts extra strain on your vehicle, you must follow certain precautions for your safety and the good of your vehicle: *[DR25800(ALL)11/92] ❑ Stay within the load limits when you tow. *[DR25900(ALL)01/95] ❑ Carefully and thoroughly prepare your *[DR26000(ALL)01/95] ❑ Use extra caution when driving your vehicle *[DR26100(ALL)01/95] ❑ Service your vehicle more frequently if you *[DR26150(ALL)05/94] Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 500 miles (800 km). *[DR26500(ALL)01/95] (See Knowing Your Vehicle’s Load Limits.) vehicle for towing, making sure to use the right equipment and to attach it properly. (See Preparing to Tow in this chapter.) while you tow. (See Driving while you tow in this chapter.) tow a trailer. (See Servicing your vehicle if you tow in this chapter.) RWARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limits of the vehicle and could result in engine damage, transaxle damage, structural damage, loss of control, and personal injury. 213 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 *[DR26580(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Do not tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is being used. Tire failure, loss of vehicle control, and possible injury to vehicle occupants could result. *[DR26600(ALL)01/95] Ten to 15% of the loaded trailer’s weight should be on the tongue. However, the tongue load should never exceed 10% of the maximum weight that your vehicle can safely tow. *[DR28500(ALL)01/95] *[DR28600(ALL)01/95] Preparing to Tow *[DR28700(ALL)01/95] Do not use hitches that clamp onto your vehicle’s bumper. The bumper is not designed to bear the load. *[DR28750(ALL)01/95] *[DR28800(ALL)05/94] Using the hitch *[DR28900(ALL)01/95] Tie down the load so that it does not shift and change the weight on the hitch. This will prevent damage to your vehicle and make your vehicle easier to handle. % For your safety and for the good of your vehicle, use the right equipment for the type of trailer you tow. Also, make sure that all towing equipment is properly attached to your vehicle. If you are not certain that you are using the right equipment in the proper manner, see your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Your vehicle uses a load carrying hitch. Because this type of hitch places the tongue load of a trailer on the rear wheels of your vehicle, you must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10 to 15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue. 214 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 *[DR28950(ALL)01/95] *[DR29000(ALL)01/95] Connecting the safety chains *[DR29100(ALL)01/95] *[DR29200(ALL)01/95] To connect the trailer’s safety chains: 1. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and attach them to your vehicle’s frame or hook retainers. Never attach the safety chains to your vehicle’s bumper. The bumper is not designed to bear the weight of a trailer. *[DR29300(ALL)01/95] 2. Make sure that you leave enough slack in the chains to allow you to turn corners. *[DR29400(ALL)01/95] If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency gives you. *[DR29450(ALL)01/95] *[DR29500(ALL)01/95] Connecting the trailer’s brakes % % *[DR29600(ALL)01/95] Always attach the trailer’s safety chains to your vehicle. They help protect your trailer if the hitch breaks. Electric brakes and manual, automatic, or surge-type hydraulic brakes are safe if you install them properly and adjust them according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure that your trailer’s brakes meet local and federal regulations. RWARNING Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. 215 File:fcdrs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:15 1995 *[DR29650(ALL)01/95] *[DR29700(ALL)01/95] % *[DR29800(ALL)01/95] *[DR29900(ALL)01/95] *[DR30000(ALL)08/95] [DR30175(ALL)04/95] [DR30200(ALL)04/95] *[DR30300(ALL)01/95] % Connecting the trailer’s lights Do not connect a trailer’s lighting system wiring directly to your vehicle’s lighting system wiring. To get the proper equipment for hooking up your trailer’s lights, see your local trailer dealer and your Ford dealer. Be sure to follow their instructions carefully. If you do not install trailer lights correctly, you may cause damage to the vehicle’s lighting system. Driving While You Tow Be especially careful when driving while you tow a trailer. Never drive faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) when you tow in hilly country on hot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you can brake gradually. When you tow in steep hills, move the automatic transaxle to 1 (First) (vehicles without O/D OFF switch) or 2 (Second) (vehicles with O/D OFF switch) when descending. This will give more engine braking on downgrades. The automatic transaxle will automatically downshift to the proper gear on upgrades. If you tow in Overdrive while riding through hilly country, your vehicle may frequently shift between Overdrive and Third gears. To prevent your vehicle from shifting too much, move the gearshift to D (Drive) (column shift without O/D OFF switch) or push the O/D OFF switch (column or console shift). This will also give better braking going down hills. If you use the speed control while you are towing on very long, steep grades, the speed control may shut off. [DR30400(ALL)04/95] Servicing Your Vehicle When You Tow *[DR30500(ALL)08/93] If you tow a trailer for a long distance, your vehicle will need to be serviced more frequently than usual. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet for additional information. 216 File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 Roadside Emergencies % If Your Vehicle Needs a Jump-Start *[RE00320(ALL)01/95] Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave the lights on or any electrical equipment on after you turn the engine off. If this happens, you may be able to jump-start from a booster battery to start your vehicle. *[RE00310(ALL)03/95] *[RE00400(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes can cause the gases around the battery to explode, causing injury and damage. Keep these things away from the battery. *[RE00500(ALL)01/95] To protect yourself when charging a battery, always shield your face and eyes. Make sure that you can breathe fresh air. 217 File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 *[RE00700(ALL)03/95] % RWARNING Be careful when lifting a battery that is in a plastic case. If you put too much pressure on the ends, you could spill acid from the vent caps, causing serious damage to the vehicle and injury to yourself. Lift the battery with a carrier or with your hands on the opposite corners. *[RE00800(ALL)01/95] % Do not let children touch the battery. Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes, and clothing. If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing, immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows the acid, have him or her drink lots of milk or water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately. *[RE00900(ALL)03/95] To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery, and to avoid injury to yourself, follow these directions for preparing your vehicle to jump-start and connecting the jumper cables in the order they are given. If in doubt, call for road service. *[RE01000(ALL)03/95] *[RE01100(ALL)03/95] Preparing Your Vehicle 1. 218 Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, so you need to use a 12-volt jumper system. You will damage your starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts if you connect them to a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt generator set). File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 *[RE01200(ALL)03/95] 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle. You could damage the vehicle’s electrical system. *[RE01300(ALL)04/95] 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle. Make sure the vehicles do not touch each other. Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts. *[RE01400(ALL)03/95] 4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the jumper cables. [RE01500(ALL)04/95] 5. Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles. If you have electronic climate control, press the V F-DEF button. Turn off all other switches and lights. *[RE01700(ALL)08/95] *[RE02500(ALL)03/95] Connecting the jumper cables 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. (You can connect either jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal, as long as you use the same cable for both positive terminals.) Most jumper cables have a red cable and a black cable. The red cable is generally used for the positive terminals and the black for the negative ones. *[RE02600(ALL)04/95] 2. Connect the other end of the first cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery. *[RE02700(ALL)03/95] 3. Connect one end of the second cable to the negative (s) terminal of the booster battery — NOT to the discharged battery. *[RE02800(ALL)04/95] 4. Connect the other end of the second cable to a good metallic surface on the engine or frame of the disabled vehicle. % 219 File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 *[RE02900(ALL)03/95] RWARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (s) terminal of the discharged battery. If you do, a spark may cause an explosion of the gases that normally surround the battery and could seriously injure someone. [RE03100(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0000388-D Jumper cable connections *[RE03400(ALL)03/95] *[RE03600(ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not in the way of moving engine parts, then start the booster vehicle. Run the engine at a moderate speed. *[RE03700(ALL)03/95] 2. Let the discharged battery charge for a few minutes and then start the disabled vehicle. It may take a couple of tries before the vehicle starts. If the vehicle does not start after several attempts, there may be a different problem. *[RE03800(ALL)03/95] 3. When both vehicles are running, let them idle for a few minutes to charge the discharged battery. 220 File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 *[RE03900(ALL)03/95] *[RE04000(ALL)03/95] Removing jumper cables 1. Always remove the jumper cables in the reverse order. Remove the negative (s) end of the jumper cable from the metallic surface on the engine or frame of the disabled vehicle. *[RE04100(ALL)03/95] 2. Remove the negative (s) cable from the booster battery. *[RE04200(ALL)03/95] 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from the booster battery. *[RE04300(ALL)03/95] 4. Remove the other end of the positive (+) cable from the discharged battery. *[RE04400(ALL)04/95] After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a while to let the engine “relearn” its idle conditions. Drive it around for a while with all electrical accessories turned off to let the battery recharge. You may need to use a battery charger to fully recharge the battery. *[RE04450(ALL)03/95] If you need to replace your battery, see Battery in the Servicing Your Vehicle chapter. *[RE04500(ALL)03/95] *[RE04600(ALL)01/95] Changing a Tire % % [RE04610(ALL)01/95] If you get a flat tire while you are driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease the speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. Park on a level spot, turn off the ignition, set the parking brake, and turn on the hazard flashers. NOTE: Tire sealants that are injected through the valve stem are not to be used to service punctured tires because they can produce wheel rust and tire imbalance. 221 File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 *[RE04700(ALL)03/95] *[RE04800(ALL)03/95] % The Temporary Spare Tire You may have a high pressure temporary spare tire. This spare tire is smaller than a regular tire and is designed for emergency use only. Use it only when you get a flat tire and replace it as soon as you can. This spare tire is marked with the words “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so that you can easily identify it. *[RE04900(ALL)01/95] RWARNING If you use the temporary spare tire continuously or do not follow these precautions, the tire could fail, causing you to lose control of the vehicle and possibly injure yourself or others. *[RE05000(ALL)01/95] When you drive with the temporary spare tire, DO NOT: *[RE05100(ALL)01/95] ❑ exceed 50 *[RE05200(ALL)01/95] ❑ load your vehicle so that it is heavier than *[RE05300(ALL)01/95] *[RE05400(ALL)01/95] *[RE05500(ALL)01/95] ❑ tow a trailer. ❑ use tire chains on this tire. ❑ try to repair the temporary spare tire or *[RE05600(ALL)01/95] *[RE05700(ALL)01/95] ❑ use the wheel for any other type of vehicle. ❑ drive through an automatic car wash with mph (80 km/h) under any circumstances. the maximum vehicle load rating listed on the tire decal. remove it from its wheel. this tire. Because the temporary spare tire is smaller than a conventional tire, it reduces the ground clearance. Your vehicle may get caught in the rails and it could be damaged. 222 File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 [RE05800(ALL)11/94] The Conventional Spare Tire (If equipped) *[RE05900(ALL)01/95] If you have the conventional spare tire, you can use it as a spare or as a regular tire. This spare tire is identical to the other tires that come with your vehicle, although the wheel may not match. % Spare Tire Location [RE06100(ALL)04/95] In a sedan, the spare tire is stored in the trunk under the floor carpet. *[RE06000(ALL)03/95] [RE06250(ALL)02/95] half page art:0001423-B The spare tire in the sedan [RE06300(ALL)11/94] In the wagon, the temporary spare tire is stored in the left side rear trim panel. 223 File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 [RE06400(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0000392-B The temporary spare tire in the wagon [RE06700(ALL)11/94] To remove the cover for the temporary spare tire in the wagon: [RE06800(ALL)04/95] 1. Twist the three fasteners 90 degrees into a vertical position. [RE06900(ALL)02/95] 2. Lift the the cover to disengage the three retainers. [RE07000(ALL)05/94] 3. Pull the front of the cover out slightly and remove the cover by sliding it toward the front of the vehicle. [RE07100(ALL)01/89] 4. Lift out the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench. *[RE07400(ALL)03/95] *[RE07500(ALL)05/94] Preparing to Change the Tire *[RE07600(ALL)03/95] 1. % You should only raise your vehicle with a jack properly placed at the front or rear jacking points. 224 Make sure that your vehicle will not move or roll. Put the gearshift in P (Park). Set the parking brake and block the wheel that is diagonally opposite the tire that you are changing. File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 *[RE08400(ALL)11/94] RWARNING When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transaxle alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park). To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, block (in both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the tire being changed. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured. *[RE08800(ALL)02/95] *[RE08850(ALL)05/94] 2. Get out the spare tire and jack. RWARNING To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off the ground when changing a tire, or at any other time. The wheel still on the ground could cause the vehicle to move. [RE08900(ALL)02/93] 3. Remove wheel covers or aluminum wheel ornaments with the tapered end of a wheel nut wrench. Insert the handle of the wrench between the wheel and ornament and twist it against the inner wheel cover flange. *[RE09200(ALL)01/95] 4. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise, but do not remove them until the tire is raised off the ground. You should pull up on the handle rather than push to develop maximum force to loosen wheel lug nuts. See Anti-Theft Wheel Lug Nuts later in this chapter for information on removing anti-theft lug nuts. 225 File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 *[RE09250(ALL)03/95] % [RE09300(ALL)11/94] * Removing and Replacing the Tire 1. *[RE09500(ALL)03/95] Find the jack notch next to the door of the tire that you are changing. Put the jack in the jack notch and turn the handle of the jack clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground. RWARNING To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part of your body under the vehicle. Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only for changing the tire in emergencies. Never raise your vehicle by using a bumper jack. The bumper system could be damaged or the jack could slip and you could be injured. [RE10000(ALL)02/95] half page art:0000394-C The notches for the jack 226 File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 [RE12000(ALL)11/94] 2. *[RE12005(ALL)07/94] Remove the lug nuts by using a lug wrench. Never loosen the hub nuts. See the picture later in this section if you are not sure where to find the lug nuts. RWARNING Your vehicle has been built with metric (12 mm) threads on the wheel studs and lug nuts. Make certain, during wheel removal, the same nuts removed are reinstalled, or if replaced, nuts with metric threads and the same chamfer configuration are used. Installation of an improper thread nut on a metric stud will not properly secure the wheel to the hub and will damage the stud so that it must be replaced. Damaged studs may result in wheel separation and personal injury. *[RE12100(ALL)01/95] 3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure that the air valve stem is facing outward. *[RE12200(ALL)03/95] 4. Reinstall the lug nuts, tightening until the wheel is snug against the hub. The beveled edges on the lug nuts face inward. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until you lower the vehicle. If you do, you could force the vehicle off the jack. *[RE12300(ALL)02/95] 5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. *[RE12400(ALL)01/95] 6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown in the following illustration. As soon as possible, have your dealer or a qualified service technician check the lug nuts for proper torque specifications. 227 File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 [RE12500(ALL)12/91] one third page art:0000395-B The lug nuts on the wheel *[RE12600(ALL)11/94] 7. Place any wheel covers and ornaments in the trunk. *[RE12700(ALL)03/95] 8. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. Make sure the jack is securely fastened so it does not rattle when you drive. *[RE12750(ALL)03/95] 9. Unblock the wheels. [RE13007(ALL)04/95] Removing and Replacing Wheel Covers [RE13008(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle may have wheel covers with a wire retention system. [RE13009(ALL)03/95] To remove the wheel cover: [RE13010(ALL)04/95] Pry it loose by carefully inserting the tapered end of the jack handle between the wheel cover and the wheel. [RE13011(ALL)04/95] To replace the wheel cover: [RE13012(ALL)04/95] 1. One of the windows on the wheel cover is identified with a valve stem logo on the back side of the cover. Install the wheel cover to the wheel with the window at the valve stem. [RE13013(ALL)04/95] 2. Hold the wheel cover in this position and press the cover onto the wheel with the palm of your hand. Do not force or hammer the cover. 228 File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 % Center Wheel Cover [RE13020(ALL)03/95] To remove the wheel cover: [RE13022(ALL)11/94] 1. Pry the center ornament off the wheelcover with the lug wrench. Pry only at the notch. Do not use a screwdriver or any other tool, as this may damage the wheelcover or the surface finish. [RE13024(ALL)04/95] 2. Remove the center bolt on the wheelcover with the lug wrench tip. [RE13026(ALL)11/94] 3. To remove the wheelcover, pry it loose by carefully inserting the tapered end of the lug wrench between the wheelcover and wheel at the outer edge. [RE13028(ALL)11/94] 4. To service the wheel or tire, remove the pedestal by removing the lug nuts. Put the pedestal in a safe place for reinstallation of the wheelcover. *[RE13015(ALL)02/95] [RE13040(ALL)11/94] half page art:0000654-C The center attachment wheel cover 229 File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 [RE13050(ALL)04/95] To replace the wheel cover: [RE13070(ALL)11/94] 1. Reinstall the pedestal on the wheel before reinstalling the wheelcover. [RE13080(ALL)11/94] 2. One of the windows on the wheelcover is identified with a valve stem logo on the inside of the cover. Align this valve hole on the wheelcover with the valve stem on the wheel. Reinstall the cover by pressing with the palm of your hand. Do not use excessive force. Do not use a hammer. [RE13090(ALL)11/94] 3. Attach the bolt to the pedestal through the center hole in the cover with the lug wrench. [RE14000(ALL)11/94] 4. Align the legs of the center ornament with the slots on the wheel cover. Reinstall the ornament by pressing with the palm of your hand. Do not use excessive force. Do not use a hammer. % Anti-Theft Wheel Lug Nuts (If equipped) [RE14200(ALL)03/95] If your vehicle has this feature, one of the lug nuts on each wheel lock must be removed and replaced with a special key. The key and registration card are attached to the lug wrench and stored with the spare tire. If you lose the key, send the registration card to the manufacturer (not to the dealer) to get a replacement key. *[RE14250(ALL)03/95] NOTE: If entire lug wrench/lug nut key assembly is lost, see your nearest Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer who has access to a master set of keys. [RE14275(ALL)11/94] DO NOT USE THE KEY WITH AN IMPACT WRENCH. *[RE14100(ALL)03/95] 230 File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 [RE14300(ALL)04/95] quarter page art:0010357-B The anti-theft lug nut and key *[RE14400(ALL)03/95] *[RE14600(ALL)03/95] Removing the anti-theft lug nut *[RE14700(ALL)03/95] Place the lug nut wrench over the lug nut key and apply pressure on the key with the wrench. Turn the wrench in a counterclockwise direction to remove the lug nut. *[RE14800(ALL)03/95] *[RE14900(ALL)03/95] Replacing the anti-theft lug nut Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Make sure that you hold the key square to the lug nut. If you hold the key on an angle, you may damage the key and the lug nut. Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Place the lug nut wrench over the lug nut key and, while applying pressure on the key, install the lug nut. 231 File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 *[RE15050(ALL)02/95] If the Engine Cranks But Does Not Start or Does Not Start After a Collision *[RE15100(ALL)04/95] *[RE15200(ALL)03/95] The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch *[RE15250(ALL)01/95] For information on how to check and reset the fuel pump shut-off switch, see Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Index. If the engine cranks but does not start or if you have had a collision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been triggered. The shut-off switch is a device that stops the fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. % Towing Your Vehicle [RE16500(ALL)08/95] If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistance center. Your Sable should be towed from the front unless conditions do not allow it. It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with wheel lift or flatbed equipment. *[RE16400(ALL)03/95] 232 File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 [RE17550(ALL)04/95] three fourths page art:0001463-A [RE17600(ALL)04/95] When calling for a tow truck, tell the operator what kind of vehicle you have. A towing manual is available from Ford Motor Company for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck driver refer to this manual for the proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. 233 File:fcres.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:02:29 1995 *[RE18000(ALL)03/95] Towing Your Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle *[RE18100(ALL)03/95] At times, you may want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle, such as a recreational vehicle, a car, or a truck. *[RE18200(ALL)03/95] *[RE18300(ALL)03/95] *[RE18400(ALL)03/95] Before you have your vehicle towed: [RE18500(ALL)01/95] *[RE18600(ALL)03/95] [RE18700(ALL)01/95] ❑ Release the parking brake. ❑ Move the gearshift to N (Neutral). ❑ Turn the key in the ignition to OFF. ❑ Unlock the steering wheel. Do not tow your vehicle at a speed faster than 35 mph (56 km/h) or for a distance greater than 50 miles (80 km), unless the drive wheels are placed on dollies. *[RE19000(ALL)03/95] RWARNING Never use a tow bar that attaches to the bumper when you tow your vehicle. You could damage the bumper and cause an accident. 234 File:fchss.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 14:28:55 1995 Customer Assistance % *[HS00205(ALL)06/94] *[HS00210(ALL)08/95] Roadside Assistance Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour, seven-day-a-week hotline with trained operators that put you in touch with the help you need if you experience a problem with your vehicle. This complimentary service is provided to you throughout your warranty period of 3 years or 36,000 miles (3 years or 60,000 km), whichever comes first. To purchase Roadside Assistance coverages beyond this period, through Ford Auto Club, contact your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer (not available in Canada). *[HS00215(ALL)06/94] *[HS00220(ALL)06/94] *[HS00225(ALL)06/94] *[HS00230(ALL)06/94] *[HS00235(ALL)06/94] *[HS00240(ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance will cover the following: *[HS00245(ALL)06/94] *[HS00250(ALL)06/94] How to use Roadside Assistance ❑ Mount your spare if you have a flat tire. ❑ Jump-start your battery if it is dead. ❑ Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out. ❑ Bring you fuel if you run out. ❑ Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound towing and repossession). Your Roadside Assistance identification card can be found in the Owner Guide portfolio in your glove compartment. Complete the card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. 235 File:fchss.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 14:28:55 1995 *[HS00255(ALL)04/95] To receive roadside assistance in the United States call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006). *[HS00260(ALL)04/95] Should you need to arrange for roadside assistance yourself, Ford Motor Company will reimburse the reasonable cost. To obtain information about reimbursement call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006). *[HS00300(ALL)01/95] *[HS00400(ALL)01/95] If You Have a Service Problem Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford and Lincoln-Mercury dealerships that can service your vehicle for you. This chapter tells you how to get service or maintenance for your vehicle. *[HS00410(ALL)03/95] *[HS00420(ALL)01/95] Tell Your Technician Booklet *[HS00425(ALL)03/95] To obtain a copy of the Tell Your Technician booklet, please contact your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. *[HS00430(ALL)01/95] The key factor in providing a fast, accurate diagnosis of a service need is a detailed description of the problem. That is why each section of the booklet follows a structured sequence, beginning with a description of the symptoms and concluding with when the problem started to occur and how often. There is also a list of vehicle sounds (noises) that are often associated with vehicle malfunctions. % At Ford, we want to make your dealership service experience as easy and pleasant as possible. That is why we have developed the Tell Your Technician booklet. This easy-to-use booklet provides a means for you to describe your service needs to your dealership service advisor. This results in more complete repair order instructions between you and dealership personnel. 236 File:fchss.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 14:28:55 1995 *[HS00440(ALL)01/95] *[HS00450(ALL)09/93] How it works In the event that your vehicle needs to be serviced, take a moment and fill out one of our Tell Your Technician booklets, and return it to the service advisor at the time of your next service visit. This booklet will help both you and your dealership service department identify “symptom” descriptions that are commonly used to describe service needs. This will help ensure that you have provided your dealership service department with sufficient information to resolve your service need in a timely manner. % Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or Canada) *[HS00600(ALL)04/95] Ford recommends taking your vehicle to your selling dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. You may, however, take your vehicle to any authorized Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, your dealer will be able to resolve your concern. *[HS00700(ALL)04/95] If you are not satisfied with the service you received from your dealership’s service department, talk to the service manager at the dealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk to the owner or general manager of the dealership. In most cases, you will have your concern resolved at this level. [HS01000(ALL)02/95] If you are away from home when your vehicle needs to be serviced, or if you need more help than the dealer gave you, contact the Ford Customer Assistance Center to find an authorized dealership that may be able to help. *[HS00505(ALL)03/95] 237 File:fchss.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 14:28:55 1995 [HS01100(ALL)02/95] If you live in the U.S. and have any questions or concerns that the dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer Assistance Center. *[HS01125(ALL)03/95] % one inch art:0060100-E *[HS01150(ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions or concerns that the dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer Assistance Centre. *[HS01175(ALL)04/95] % one inch art:0060101-C *[HS01200(ALL)04/95] Please have the following information available when contacting the Customer Assistance Centre: *[HS01300(ALL)04/95] ❑ your telephone number (both business and *[HS01400(ALL)03/95] ❑ the name of the dealer and the city where the *[HS01500(ALL)03/95] *[HS01550(ALL)03/95] *[HS01600(ALL)03/95] *[HS01700(ALL)03/95] ❑ the year and make of your vehicle ❑ the date purchased ❑ the current mileage on your vehicle ❑ your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) home) dealership is located listed on your owner card and/or your vehicle ownership license 238 File:fchss.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 14:28:55 1995 [HS01800(ALL)03/95] one inch art:0010630-A Vehicle Identification Number (VIN/Serial Number) [HS02200(ALL)11/94] If you still have a service or product complaint, you may wish to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. only) or the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) in Canada. % The Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. Only) *[HS02400(ALL)03/95] The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary, independent dispute-settlement program available free to owners or lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company vehicles. *[HS02500(ALL)01/95] The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures and/or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without incurring obligations. *[HS02600(ALL)01/95] What Kind of Cases Does the Board Review? *[HS02700(ALL)03/95] The Board reviews all product performance and service complaints on Ford, Mercury and Lincoln Cars and Ford and Mercury Light Trucks under warranty that have not been resolved by a dealer or Ford Motor Company. *[HS02750(ALL)03/95] *[HS02800(ALL)01/95] *[HS02900(ALL)01/95] The Board does not review issues involving: *[HS02300(ALL)02/95] ❑ A non-Ford product ❑ A non-Ford dealership 239 File:fchss.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 14:28:55 1995 *[HS03100(ALL)01/95] *[HS03200(ALL)01/95] ❑ A vehicle sales transaction ❑ A request for reimbursement of consequential *[HS03300(ALL)01/95] *[HS03400(ALL)01/95] *[HS03450(ALL)01/95] ❑ Items not covered by your warranty ❑ Alleged liability claims ❑ Property damage where such damage is *[HS03500(ALL)01/95] *[HS03600(ALL)01/95] ❑ Cases currently in litigation ❑ Vehicles not used primarily for personal, *[HS03650(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles on which applicable express written new vehicle warranties have expired at receipt of your application are not eligible. Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique brochure for California purchasers/lessees. *[HS03700(ALL)04/95] *[HS03800(ALL)04/95] *[HS03900(ALL)04/95] *[HS04000(ALL)04/95] *[HS04200(ALL)04/95] How Does the Board Work? *[HS04300(ALL)04/95] If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and 36,000 miles of the date of delivery (warranty start date), you have a right to make an oral presentation before the Board by indicating your choice on the application. Also, oral expenses unless incidental to a service or product complaint being reviewed significant when compared to the economic loss alleged under the warranty dispute family, or household purposes The Board has four members: ❑ three consumer representatives ❑ a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by an independent consulting firm. Dealers are chosen because of their business leadership qualities. 240 File:fchss.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 14:28:55 1995 presentations may be requested by the Board. A decision is made by the Board by simple majority vote. *[HS04350(ALL)04/95] Board members review all the materials related to each complaint and, based on the available information, arrive at a fair and impartial decision. Decisions are based on the written statements and any oral presentations made by each of the involved parties. *[HS04400(ALL)04/95] Because the Board usually meets only once a month, some cases will take longer than 30 days to be reviewed. The Board will make every effort to resolve each case within 40 days after it receives the customer application form. *[HS04500(ALL)04/95] After your case has been reviewed, the Board will mail you its decision in writing. It will also provide you with a form to indicate your acceptance or rejection of an award decision. The decisions of the Board are binding on the dealer and Ford, but customers may have other options available to them under state or federal law. *[HS04600(ALL)04/95] The decisions of the Board, however, may be introduced into evidence by any party in subsequent legal proceedings that may be initiated. *[HS04700(ALL)01/95] *[HS04800(ALL)04/95] How Do You Contact the Board? Write to the Board at the following address to request a brochure/application. You will be sent a brochure and a one-page customer application form. The form should be completed and mailed to the same address. 241 File:fchss.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 14:28:55 1995 *[HS04900(ALL)02/93] one inch art:0060102-B *[HS05100(ALL)04/95] *[HS05200(ALL)04/95] What is the Review Process? *[HS05300(ALL)04/95] To review your case properly, the Board needs the following information: *[HS05400(ALL)04/95] ❑ legible copies of all documents and *[HS05500(ALL)04/95] ❑ the year, make, model, and vehicle *[HS05600(ALL)04/95] *[HS05700(ALL)04/95] ❑ the date you bought your vehicle ❑ the date of repair and the mileage at the time *[HS05800(ALL)04/95] *[HS05900(ALL)04/95] ❑ the current mileage ❑ the name of the dealer who sold you the *[HS06000(ALL)04/95] ❑ a brief description of your unresolved *[HS06100(ALL)04/95] ❑ a brief summary of actions that were taken Your application will be reviewed and if it is determined to be eligible, you will receive an acknowledgment indicating the file number assigned to your application and the local Board address. At the same time, your dealer and Ford Motor Company representative are asked to submit statements. maintenance or repair orders that relate to the case identification number of repair vehicle or who serviced your vehicle complaint with the dealer and Ford Motor Company 242 File:fchss.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 14:28:55 1995 *[HS06200(ALL)04/95] ❑ the names *[HS06300(ALL)04/95] ❑ a description of the action you want done to *[HS06305(ALL)04/95] Should your application NOT qualify for review, an explanation will be mailed to you. (if known) of all people you contacted at the dealership resolve your concern. % Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only) *[HS06340(ALL)01/95] If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. *[HS06360(ALL)01/95] If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. *[HS06380(ALL)01/95] To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, 400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. *[HS06320(ALL)01/95] % Ford of Canada Customer Assistance *[HS07800(ALL)03/95] *[HS07850(ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited *[HS07700(ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions or concerns that the dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer Assistance Centre. 243 File:fchss.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 14:28:55 1995 *[HS07950(ALL)03/95] one inch art:0060101-C *[HS07960(ALL)04/95] Please have the following information available when contacting the Customer Assistance Centre: *[HS07980(ALL)04/95] ❑ your telephone number (both business and *[HS08000(ALL)02/95] ❑ your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) *[HS08020(ALL)03/95] *[HS08040(ALL)03/95] *[HS08060(ALL)03/95] ❑ the year and make of your vehicle ❑ the date purchased ❑ the name of the dealer and the city where the *[HS08080(ALL)02/95] % [HS08100(ALL)03/95] * ❑ the current mileage on your vehicle. home) listed on your owner card and/or your vehicle ownership license. dealership is located Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) *[HS08200(ALL)03/95] If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between a vehicle owner, Ford of Canada, and/or one of its dealers (that all parties can agree upon), the owner may wish to use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). *[HS08300(ALL)03/95] CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling and preparing for their arbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed with 244 File:fchss.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 14:28:55 1995 CAMVAP you must follow your manufacturer’s dispute resolution process as outlined under “Ford of Canada Customer Assistance” earlier in this chapter. *[HS08400(ALL)03/95] Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the program can obtain an information booklet from your dealer or contact the Provincial Administrator, Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan, at the address or telephone number shown below. *[HS08450(ALL)04/95] O & P Services 595 Bay Street — Suite 300 Toronto, Ontario M5G 2C2 Telephone 1 (800) 207-0685 [HS08500(ALL)04/95] This plan is not available in the province of Quebec. % Getting Help Outside the U.S. and Canada *[HS08700(ALL)04/95] Before you export your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate to make sure local regulations do not prevent you from registering your vehicle. Officials at the embassy can also help you decide whether you should import your vehicle to that country. *[HS08800(ALL)06/95] Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell you where to get unleaded fuel. If you cannot get unleaded fuel or can get only fuel with an anti-knock index that is lower than your vehicle needs, contact a district or owner relations office before you leave the U.S. or Canada. *[HS08900(ALL)01/95] Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without a proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emissions control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford *[HS08600(ALL)03/95] 245 File:fchss.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 14:28:55 1995 Motor Company is not responsible for any damage that is caused by use of improper fuel. *[HS09000(ALL)01/95] You may also have difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U.S. if you use leaded fuel. *[HS09100(ALL)01/95] If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write to: *[HS09200(ALL)04/95] one inch art:0095024-A *[HS09300(ALL)01/95] If you are in other foreign countries, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, they can direct you to the appropriate Ford affiliate office. *[HS09400(ALL)04/95] If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada, register your Vehicle Identification Number and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations. 246 File:fcacs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:01:40 1995 Accessories *[AC00200(ALL)03/95] *[AC00225(ALL)04/95] Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle Ford has many fine products available from your dealer to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. For best results, use the following, or products of equivalent quality: [AC00250(ALL)03/95] twelve pica chart:0001434-A 247 File:fcacs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:01:40 1995 *[AC00300(ALL)04/95] A wide selection of accessories is available through your local authorized dealer. These fine accessories have been engineered specifically to fulfill your automotive needs. They are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your Ford-built vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigid engineering and safety specifications. That is why Ford brand accessories are warranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever comes first. See your dealer for complete warranty information and accessory availability. *[AC00350(ALL)03/95] Safety, Comfort, and Convenience [AC00400(ALL)02/95] eighteen pica chart:0000569-M 248 File:fcacs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:01:40 1995 *[AC00600(ALL)01/95] NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment, passengers, and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label). Consult your dealer for specific weight information. *[AC00700(ALL)01/95] NOTE: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) regulates the use of mobile communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones, and theft alarms — that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC regulation and should be installed only by a qualified technician. *[AC00800(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use or are not properly installed. For example, when operated, such systems may cause the engine to stumble or stall. In addition, such systems may themselves be damaged or their operation affected by operating your vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers, and other transmitters whose power output is 5 watts or less will not ordinarily affect your vehicle’s operation.) *[AC00900(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Because we have no control over the installation, design, or manufacture of such systems, Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage that may result if you use this equipment. 249 File:fcacs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:01:40 1995 [AC01250(S )04/95] thirty-six pica chart:0001478-A 250 File:fcacs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:01:40 1995 [AC01300(S )04/95] thirty-six pica chart:0001479-A 251 File:fcacs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:01:40 1995 [AC01350(S )04/95] thirty-six pica chart:0001480-A 252 File:fcacs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:01:40 1995 [AC01400(S )11/94] thirty-six pica chart:0001395-A 253 File:fcacs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 11:01:40 1995 [AC01500(S )02/93] thirty-six pica chart:BLANK 254 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 Servicing Your Sable % Service Made Easy *[SV00300(ALL)03/95] *[SV00400(ALL)01/95] *[SV00500(ALL)01/95] Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle. 1. When we can, we design parts that do not need to be serviced. *[SV00600(ALL)01/95] 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle as easy as possible. To help you: *[SV00700(ALL)01/95] ❑ We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow in *[SV00800(ALL)01/95] ❑ When possible, we design parts — such as *[SV00900(ALL)05/94] ❑ We give you a Maintenance Schedule that *[SV01000(ALL)01/95] This chapter tells you about the basic parts that you need to check and service regularly. *[SV01100(ALL)03/95] If your vehicle needs professional servicing, see the Customer Assistance chapter. *[SV01200(ALL)03/95] Check your Warranty Information Booklet to find out which parts are covered. *[SV01250(ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company recommends that you perform the Owner Maintenance Checks listed in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. These services are important for the proper operation of your vehicle. In addition to the conditions listed in the Owner Maintenance the engine compartment so that you can find them easily. the headlamp bulbs — that can be replaced without tools. makes tracking routine service for your vehicle easy. The maintenance schedule is located in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. 255 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 Checklist, be alert for any unusual noise, vibration, or other indication that your vehicle may need service. If you do notice something unusual, see that your vehicle is serviced promptly. *[SV01275(ALL)03/95] Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids, and service parts conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. Using these parts for replacement is your assurance that Ford-built quality stays in your vehicle. *[SV01300(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call your local recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids. % Precautions When Servicing Your Vehicle *[SV01700(ALL)01/95] Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle. Here are some general precautions for your safety: *[SV01600(ALL)03/95] *[SV01800(ALL)08/95] % ❑ Do not work on a hot engine. The engine cooling fans may come on unexpectedly. Always turn the engine off and let it cool. *[SV01850(ALL)08/95] RWARNING Your vehicle is equipped with two automatic cooling fans. It may come on at any time without warning. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative terminal of the battery before working near the fan. 256 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV01900(ALL)03/95] ❑ If you must work with the engine running, *[SV02000(ALL)01/95] ❑ Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosed *[SV02100(ALL)01/95] ❑ Never get under a vehicle while it is *[SV02200(ALL)01/95] ❑ Keep all lit cigarettes and other smoking *[SV02250(ALL)03/95] If you disconnect the battery, the engine must “relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle will drive properly. To find out how the engine does this, see Battery in this chapter. *[SV02550(ALL)03/95] *[SV02600(ALL)03/95] Working with the engine off: 1. Set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). *[SV02625(ALL)03/95] 2. Remove the key from the ignition after you turn the engine off. *[SV02650(ALL)03/95] 3. Block the wheels. This will prevent your vehicle from moving unexpectedly. *[SV02700(ALL)03/95] *[SV02800(ALL)03/95] Working with the engine on: 1. Set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). *[SV02825(ALL)03/95] 2. Block the wheels. This will prevent your vehicle from moving unexpectedly. avoid wearing loose clothing or jewelry that could get caught in moving parts. Take appropriate precautions with long hair. space with the engine running, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. supported by a jack only. If you must work under a vehicle, use safety stands. materials away from the battery and all fuel-related parts. 257 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV03000(ALL)02/95] RWARNING Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. *[SV03100(ALL)03/95] % [SV03200(ALL)01/95] * % Opening the Hood 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the bottom left corner of the instrument panel. % 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is located under the hood at the center of the vehicle. *[SV03400(ALL)01/95] 3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open. *[SV03500(ALL)01/95] Whenever you close the hood, latch it securely. *[SV03300(ALL)02/95] 258 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV03550(ALL)11/94] full page art:0000689-E The hood release, hood latch, and lift cylinder assembly 259 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV04350(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Read and understand Precautions When Servicing Your Vehicle at the beginning of this chapter before opening the hood. *[SV04500(ALL)04/95] *[SV04600(ALL)09/93] Engine Compartment % [SV04700(ALL)08/95] [SV04750(ALL)08/95] *[SV04850(ALL)11/94] Your vehicle has one of these types of engines: ❑ a 3.0L Vulcan engine ❑ a 3.0L Duratec engine The following pages show diagrams of each engine type and where to find items that you should regularly service. 260 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV05000(ALL)02/95] full page art:0000299-H The 3.0 liter Vulcan engine 261 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV05025(ALL)02/95] full page art:0000301-H The 3.0 liter Duratec engine 262 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV05075(ALL)04/95] *[SV06000(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Engine *[SV06020(ALL)04/95] ❑ Extreme care must be used if a power washer *[SV06040(ALL)04/95] ❑ In order to avoid possible cracking of the *[SV06060(ALL)04/95] ❑ The alternator, distributor and air intake must *[SV06080(ALL)04/95] ❑ Never wash or rinse the engine while it is % A clean engine is more efficient because the engine is able to cool properly. A build up of grease and dirt acts as an insulator, keeping the engine warmer than normal. is used to clean the engine. The high pressure fluid could penetrate sealed parts and assemblies causing damage or malfunctions. engine block or fuel injection pump, do not spray a hot engine or injection pump with cold water. be covered. Covering these components will help prevent water damage. running. Water getting into the engine may cause internal damage. % Filling the Fuel Tank [SV06800(ALL)04/95] 1. *[SV06100(ALL)03/95] Turn the engine off. After opening the fuel door, remove the cap carefully and slowly by turning it counterclockwise 1/4 turn until it stops. Pull to remove the cap. A tether attaches the cap to the fuel filler pipe. [SV06825(ALL)04/95] one inch art:0001470-A 263 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV06850(ALL)04/95] RWARNING The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others. *[SV06900(ALL)03/95] 2. *[SV06950(ALL)02/95] NOTE: To help reduce early nozzle shutoffs and fuel spillage, park your vehicle so that the fuel filler door is not downhill. Do not tilt or turn the nozzle upside down when filling. Avoid excessively fast fuel dispensing rates (over 10 gallons [38 liters] per minute). *[SV07150(ALL)01/95] 3. If you spill any fuel on the body of your vehicle, clean it off immediately. The fuel may dull or soften the paint if you do not wash it off. [SV07200(ALL)11/94] 4. To replace the fuel cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe. Turn it clockwise until it stops. [SV07250(ALL)04/95] 5. Push the fuel door closed. [SV07275(ALL)04/95] If the Service Engine Soon warning light comes on and stays on when you start the engine, the fuel cap may not be properly seated. Turn off the engine, remove the fuel cap and replace it, being careful to align the cap properly. For more information, see Warning lights in the Index. 264 Make sure that you pump unleaded fuel and put the nozzle all the way inside the fuel filler pipe. File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV07300(ALL)03/95] % RWARNING If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with one that is an authorized Motorcraft service part or an equivalent part. If you do not use the proper fuel cap, the pressure in the fuel tank can damage the fuel system or cause it to work improperly in a collision, endangering you and your passengers. *[SV07350(ALL)01/95] NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with an aftermarket fuel filler cap, the customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank and/or fuel system. *[SV07500(ALL)03/95] Choosing the Right Fuel [SV07601(ALL)12/95] Use only UNLEADED FUEL. Using leaded fuel is prohibited by federal law. Any vehicle damage may not be covered by your warranty. % Octane Recommendations [SV08800(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is designed to use regular fuel with an octane rating of 87. In most cases it is not necessary to use a fuel with an octane rating higher than 87. At service stations, the octane rating is displayed in a label on the pumps. *[SV08725(ALL)03/95] 265 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV08900(ALL)07/90] one inch art:0060001-C Typical octane rating label [SV09000(ALL)12/95] We do not recommend gasolines labeled “regular” that are sold with octane ratings of 86 or even less in high altitude areas. [SV09100(ALL)12/95] Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions on the recommended octane rating fuel, see your dealer or a qualified service technician to prevent any engine damage. 266 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV09490(ALL)03/95] Fuel quality [SV09601(ALL)12/95] Ford approves the use of gasolines, including those reformulated, that contain oxygenates such as ethanol (10% maximum) and MTBE (15% maximum). If methanol is used, the gasoline should contain no more than 5% with cosolvents. [SV09701(ALL)12/95] If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation problems, try a different brand of fuel. If the condition persists, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. 267 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV10185(ALL)01/95] % Safety Information Relating to Automotive Fuels *[SV10195(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. To minimize the risk that you will be injured, please read the following information carefully and observe the recommended precautions. *[SV10200(ALL)01/95] Gasoline and other automotive fuels are extremely flammable. Turn your vehicle off and do not smoke while refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks and other sources of ignition away from fuels. *[SV10205(ALL)03/95] Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Never attempt to siphon any fuel by mouth. *[SV10210(ALL)03/95] If any fuel is swallowed, call a physician or poison control center immediately. Do not delay calling a physician merely because no adverse effects are noticed at first; the toxic effects of fuels may not become apparent for many hours. *[SV10213(ALL)03/95] If gasoline is swallowed, do not induce vomiting. If a gasoline-methanol blend is swallowed, induce vomiting under the direction of a physician or poison control center. *[SV10215(ALL)03/95] Gasoline and gasoline blends may contain small amounts of carcinogens, such as benzene. Long-term exposure to unleaded gasoline vapors has caused cancer in laboratory animals. Excessive inhalation of fuel vapors can cause headache, dizziness, nausea, loss of coordination, and other symptoms which could interfere with 268 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 your ability to safely operate your vehicle. Avoid breathing vapors while refueling. If fuel vapors are inhaled in excessive quantities, move the victim to fresh air and seek medical attention. *[SV10220(ALL)03/95] Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. Be careful not to splash fuel on yourself or your clothing. If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash the skin thoroughly with soap and water. *[SV10225(ALL)02/95] Fuels can cause severe eye irritation and possibly eye damage. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with large amounts of water for 15 minutes, and seek medical attention. *[SV10230(ALL)01/95] You should be particularly careful if you are taking the medication “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. There is a possibility that breathing the vapors of a gasoline-methanol blend, or skin contact with such a blend, may cause the same kind of adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholic beverage. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness could result. Consult a physician promptly if you experience an adverse reaction. *[SV10250(ALL)01/95] Fuel line service [SV10270(ALL)11/94] Fuel injection systems operate with pressurized fuel. The fuel lines are under pressure even when the engine is off. This system should be serviced by an authorized dealer using only Ford approved parts. Using other materials may be hazardous or allow hydrocarbon emissions above the legal levels set by the Federal Government. 269 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 % Running Out of Fuel [SV11500(ALL)05/91] If your vehicle runs out of fuel, try to stop on level ground away from traffic. Add at least one gallon (four liters) of fuel to start your vehicle again. If your vehicle is not on level ground, you may need as much as five gallons (20 liters) of fuel to start it. *[SV11550(ALL)02/95] You may need to crank the engine several times before the fuel system starts to pump fuel from the tank to the engine. *[SV11575(ALL)03/95] If the engine does not start, check the fuel pump shut-off switch and reset as required. See Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Index. *[SV11300(ALL)01/95] *[SV11580(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Never pour fuel in the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in fire and personal injury. *[SV13505(ALL)01/95] *[SV13510(ALL)04/95] Calculating the Fuel Economy *[SV13515(ALL)04/95] *[SV13521(ALL)04/95] To calculate fuel economy: % Fuel economy is an estimate. It tells you approximately the distance you can drive for each gallon (liter) of fuel that your vehicle uses. Do not calculate the fuel economy during your vehicle’s break-in period. This would not be an accurate estimate of how much fuel your vehicle will normally use. 1. 270 Make sure the fuel tank is full when you record the first odometer reading. File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV13526(ALL)04/95] 2. Then, every time you buy fuel, fill the tank completely and write down the number of miles (kilometers) that you have driven and the number of gallons (liters) of fuel that you buy. Keep a record for at least a month. This will give you a more accurate estimate than figuring the fuel economy based on only one or two readings. *[SV13530(ALL)04/95] *[SV13535(ALL)04/95] 3. Divide the total number of miles that you have driven by the total number of gallons that your vehicle has used. In metric, multiply the number of liters used by 100 and divide the answer by the number of kilometers traveled. This will give you the number of liters used per 100 km. *[SV13540(ALL)01/95] Comparisons With EPA Fuel Economy Estimates *[SV13545(ALL)03/95] EPA fuel economy figures are obtained from laboratory tests under simulated road conditions and thus are estimates which may not reflect the actual conditions you experience or your style of driving. In addition to your individual driving habits, optional equipment such as air conditioning can have substantial effects on fuel economy. Other factors that may affect fuel economy include vehicle load and tire inflation pressure. The EPA fuel economy estimate is not a guarantee that you will achieve the fuel economy shown. *[SV13555(ALL)03/95] *[SV13561(ALL)02/95] Improving Fuel Economy Fuel economy is affected by a number of variables which can reduce efficiency. You can improve fuel economy by understanding these variables and minimizing their effect. 271 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV13564(ALL)02/95] *[SV13568(ALL)02/95] *[SV13572(ALL)02/95] *[SV13576(ALL)02/95] *[SV13581(ALL)02/95] *[SV13584(ALL)02/95] *[SV13589(ALL)02/95] *[SV13591(ALL)02/95] *[SV13593(ALL)02/95] The following decrease fuel economy: *[SV13596(ALL)02/95] *[SV13598(ALL)02/95] *[SV13599(ALL)02/95] ❑ Underinflated tires ❑ Heavy loads ❑ Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski or *[SV13605(ALL)02/95] *[SV13611(ALL)01/95] Self-Service Pointers *[SV13615(ALL)01/95] The following procedures require only a tire gauge, a rag, an oil can spout and windshield washer fluid. *[SV13620(ALL)01/95] *[SV13625(ALL)01/95] ❑ Check the engine oil at every refueling stop ❑ Clean the windshield, outside mirrors and *[SV13630(ALL)01/95] *[SV13633(ALL)02/95] *[SV13636(ALL)01/95] ❑ Check windshield washer fluid ❑ Check tires for excessive wear or worn edges ❑ Check the tire pressure at least monthly ❑ Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance ❑ Excessive speed ❑ Rapid acceleration ❑ Driving with your foot on the brake ❑ Sudden stops ❑ Extended engine idling ❑ Using speed control in hilly terrain ❑ Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rear window defroster and other accessories luggage racks, bug deflectors, etc. If you choose to do your own fueling, you should also perform a few simple maintenance routines. This extra effort will save you additional money and contribute to the driving efficiency of your vehicle. headlights 272 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 % *[SV13638(ALL)03/95] *[SV13639(ALL)04/95] Engine Oil Recommendations We recommend using Motorcraft oil or an equivalent oil meeting Ford Specification ESE-M2C153-E and displaying the American Petroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK on the front of the container. *[SV13650(ALL)03/95] one third page art:0060021-E The API Certification Mark *[SV13670(ALL)01/95] *[SV13680(ALL)01/95] *[SV13690(ALL)04/95] % [SV13700(ALL)01/95] * Never use: [SV13710(ALL)02/95] Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity are PREFERRED for your vehicle. They provide the best engine performance, fuel economy and engine protection for all climates down to -15˚F (-25˚C). *[SV13770(ALL)03/95] % ❑ “Non-Detergent” oils ❑ Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG ❑ Additional engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine treatments Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED and of the preferred viscosity may be used in your engine. The engine oil and oil filter must still be changed according to the maintenance schedule. 273 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV13775(ALL)01/95] *[SV13800(ALL)03/95] Checking and Adding Engine Oil *[SV13900(ALL)04/95] *[SV14000(ALL)02/95] Checking the engine oil level: 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed up and allow a few minutes for the engine oil to drain back into the oil pan. *[SV14025(ALL)03/95] 2. Set the parking brake, making sure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). *[SV14100(ALL)02/95] 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat. *[SV14200(ALL)03/95] 4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted in yellow) and carefully pull it out of the engine. *[SV14300(ALL)01/95] 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back into position, making sure it is fully seated. % % Since the proper amount of engine oil is important for safe engine operation, check the oil using the dipstick each time you put fuel in your vehicle. Remember the engine must be off, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be parked on level ground. [SV14400(ALL)02/95] one inch art:0001397-A Engine oil dipstick (3.0L Vulcan) [SV14475(ALL)08/95] one inch art:0001398-B Engine oil dipstick (3.0L Duratec) 274 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV14500(ALL)03/95] 6. Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If the oil level is below the “ADD 1 QT” line, add engine oil as necessary. If the oil level is beyond the letter “F” in Full, engine damage or high oil consumption may occur and some oil must be removed from the engine. *[SV14600(ALL)01/95] 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it is fully seated. *[SV14700(ALL)03/95] *[SV14800(ALL)01/95] Adding engine oil *[SV15000(ALL)03/95] Add engine oil through the oil filler cap highlighted in yellow. To add oil, remove the filler cap and use a funnel to pour oil into the opening. Be careful not to overfill the engine. Recheck the oil level after you finish adding oil. % It may be necessary to add some oil between oil changes. Make sure you use a CERTIFIED engine oil of the preferred viscosity. Your vehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply if engine damage is caused by the use of improper engine oil. % Changing the Engine Oil and the Oil Filter [SV16400(ALL)04/95] Change the engine oil and oil filter per the following, whichever occurs first. *[SV16300(ALL)01/95] [SV16500(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0060618-C 275 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV16550(ALL)04/95] Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record Booklet for additional information. [SV16600(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call your local recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids. [SV16700(ALL)04/95] RWARNING Continuous contact with USED motor oil has caused cancer in laboratory mice. Protect your skin by washing with soap and water. *[SV17300(ALL)03/95] % [SV17320(ALL)03/95] * *[SV17350(ALL)01/95] % Engine Coolant Checking the Engine Coolant NOTE: Be sure to read and understand Precautions When Servicing Your Vehicle at the beginning of this chapter. *[SV17400(ALL)08/95] RWARNING Your vehicle is equipped with two automatic cooling fans. It may come on at any time without warning. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative terminal of the battery before working near the fan. *[SV17600(ALL)05/94] % Your vehicle’s coolant protects your engine from overheating in the summer and from freezing in the winter. Check the level of the coolant at least once a month. Simply look at the engine coolant 276 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 reservoir located in the engine compartment. To locate the reservoir, see the diagram of your vehicle’s engine under Engine Type, in this chapter. *[SV17650(ALL)08/95] The coolant additives also protect the entire cooling system from internal passageway corrosion and these additives lubricate the water pump. The coolant should be serviced as noted in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. [SV17700(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0000305-E The engine coolant reservoir (3.0L Vulcan shown — 3.0L Duratec similar) [SV17750(ALL)04/95] The coolant level in the reservoir should be maintained within the cold fill range. [SV17900(ALL)02/95] There may be a low coolant warning light in the instrument cluster which will light when the coolant level is low. *[SV18000(ALL)11/94] *[SV18050(ALL)11/94] Checking hoses % Inspect all engine and heater system hoses and hose connections for deterioration, leaks, and loose hose clamps as specified in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. Repair or replace with Motorcraft hoses or equivalent as necessary. 277 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV18100(ALL)01/95] *[SV18200(ALL)01/95] Adding engine coolant RWARNING Be careful when adding engine coolant. Do not put engine coolant or antifreeze in the container for the windshield washer fluid. If sprayed to clean the glass, engine coolant or antifreeze could make it difficult to see through the windshield. [SV18300(ALL)11/94] RWARNING Never remove the pressure cap while the engine is running or hot to avoid personal injury that can be caused by escaping steam or engine coolant. [SV18500(ALL)04/95] 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let it cool. Even when the engine is cool, be careful when you remove the cap. [SV18600(ALL)02/95] 2. When the engine is cold, wrap a thick cloth around the cap and turn it slowly counterclockwise to relieve pressure. *[SV18700(ALL)03/95] *[SV18800(ALL)03/95] 3. Step back while the pressure releases. 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the cloth to turn and remove cap. *[SV18900(ALL)02/95] 5. Stand away from the reservoir opening. Hot steam may blow out or hot engine coolant may even splash out. 278 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV19000(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious personal injury from hot engine coolant or steam blowout and/or damage to the engine cooling system or engine. *[SV19050(ALL)03/95] To find out how much engine coolant mixture your vehicle’s coolant system can hold, see Refill capacities for fluids in the Index. [SV19100(ALL)04/95] Add engine coolant only to the coolant reservoir. If the coolant level is low, add to the reservoir a 50/50 mixture of water and the type of engine coolant that Ford specifies. You may add water by itself only in an emergency, but you should replace it with a 50/50 mixture as soon as possible. [SV19104(ALL)04/95] Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid is an optimized formula that will protect all metal and rubber elastomers used in Ford engines for four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km). It is not necessary and not recommended to use supplemental coolant additives in your vehicle. These additives may harm your engine cooling system. Follow the recommended service interval for changing your engine coolant. *[SV19106(ALL)04/94] NOTE: When you change or add engine coolant, it is important to maintain your engine coolant concentration between 40% (-11˚F [-24˚C]) and 60% (-62˚F [-52˚C]), depending on your local climate conditions. Below 40% you will lose freeze protection and above 60% your engine may overheat on a warm day. 279 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV19107(ALL)02/95] NOTE: Less than 40% of coolant concentration may cause engine corrosion and overheating. Plain water may be used in an emergency only. Replace it with the specified coolant as quickly as possible. *[SV19108(ALL)03/95] NOTE: The use of an improper coolant may void your warranty for the engine cooling system. Use only a premium, nationally recognized brand name engine coolant. Do not use alcohol, methanol antifreeze or engine coolant mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. If you do not use the proper coolant, the aluminum engine on your vehicle will corrode. *[SV19110(ALL)08/95] Ford Motor Company expressly authorizes the Ford Rotunda engine coolant recycling process and chemicals. Use only Ford Rotunda recycled engine coolant or an equivalent recycled engine coolant that is certified by the supplier to meet Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A. *[SV19112(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call your local recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids. *[SV19115(ALL)03/95] Use Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid E2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B) or an equivalent engine coolant that meets Ford Specification ESE-M97B44-A. *[SV19150(ALL)11/94] Have your dealer check the engine cooling system for leaks if: *[SV19200(ALL)11/94] ❑ you have to add engine coolant more than once a month, or 280 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV19250(ALL)11/94] ❑ you have to add more than a quart (liter) at a *[SV19300(ALL)04/95] *[SV19350(ALL)11/94] Engine coolant drain and flush *[SV19400(ALL)02/95] *[SV19450(ALL)01/95] Engine coolant refill procedure [SV19500(ALL)04/95] ❑ With the engine OFF and cool, remove the % % time Proper procedures for a complete coolant drain and flush of the cooling system can be found in the Car Service Manual. Following these recommended procedures will ensure that the specified coolant level and a 50/50 or appropriate mixture of coolant and water is maintained. When the entire cooling system is drained and refilled, the following procedure should be used to ensure a complete fill: pressure cap, located on the coolant reservoir. [SV19550(ALL)04/95] ❑ Add a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant and water to the coolant reservoir. Refer to Refill Capacities later in this chapter for the correct amount. [SV19600(ALL)02/95] ❑ Continue to fill the reservoir until the coolant is at the top of the cold fill range. *[SV19700(ALL)03/95] ❑ Reinstall the pressure cap until it clicks. ❑ Start and idle the engine until the radiator [SV19750(ALL)04/95] ❑ Immediately shut off the engine and let cool. [SV19650(ALL)04/95] upper hose is warm (this indicates the thermostat is open and coolant is flowing through the entire system). Cautiously remove the pressure cap and add a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant and water until the coolant is within the cold fill range in the coolant reservoir. [SV19800(ALL)02/95] ❑ Reinstall the pressure cap until a click is heard and felt. 281 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV19850(ALL)03/95] *[SV19900(ALL)03/95] ❑ Check for leaks at the draincock. ❑ Recheck the engine coolant level, using the [SV19950(ALL)04/95] About Your Battery *[SV20001(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle may have a Motorcraft maintenance-free battery. When the original equipment battery is replaced under warranty, it may be replaced by a Motorcraft Low-Maintenance Battery. [SV20850(ALL)04/95] Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. If you ever disconnect the battery or install a new battery, you must allow the computer to “relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle will drive properly. To begin this process, put the gearshift in P (Park), set the parking brake, turn off all the accessories, and start the vehicle. Bring the engine to normal operating temperature. Allow the engine to idle for one minute in N (Neutral) and one minute in Drive or Overdrive. Perform the previous procedure with the air conditioning on and off (conditions permitting). The relearning process will complete automatically as you drive the vehicle. *[SV21000(ALL)03/95] If you do not let the engine relearn its idle, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle is relearned. Your vehicle will eventually relearn its idle while you drive it, but it takes much longer than if you use the previous procedure. recommended procedure, after one or two occasions of vehicle use. 282 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV21100(ALL)03/95] *[SV21200(ALL)04/95] % Help Us Protect Our Environment Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that used lead-acid batteries be returned to an authorized recycling facility for disposal. *[SV21300(ALL)03/95] one inch art:0000983-A Battery recycling symbol *[SV21700(ALL)03/95] Windshield Washer Fluid and Wipers % *[SV21800(ALL)03/95] Washer Fluid [SV21900(ALL)11/94] Check the level of the windshield washer fluid every time you stop for fuel. The reservoir for washer fluid is located on the passenger’s side of the engine compartment and is highlighted with a washer symbol. % [SV22205(ALL)11/94] one third page art:0000308-B The windshield washer fluid reservoir 283 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV22400(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Do not add the windshield washer fluid to the engine coolant reservoir. This could damage your cooling system. Do not add engine coolant to the washer fluid reservoir. This could damage your wiper/washer system. *[SV22500(ALL)01/95] Use specially formulated windshield washer fluid rather than plain water, because specially formulated washer fluids contain additives that dissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washer fluids containing an appropriate antifreeze such as methanol should be used in freezing weather (temperatures below 32˚F [0˚C]). State or local regulations on Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC’s) may restrict use of the most common antifreeze, methanol. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades, and windshield washer system. [SV22550(ALL)04/95] RWARNING Washer solution contains methanol which is poisonous. Observe all warnings indicated on label of washer solution. [SV22600(ALL)06/94] Checking the washer fluid for the liftgate (If equipped) [SV23100(ALL)04/95] If your wagon has a rear window wiper, check the reservoir for its washer fluid regularly. This is not the same reservoir that your windshield wipers use. The opening for this reservoir is on the right side of the liftgate opening, below the tail lamp. Refill this reservoir with the same 284 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 solution you use for your windshield. To find out how much washer fluid the reservoir holds, see Refill Capacities later in this chapter. *[SV23200(ALL)03/95] *[SV23300(ALL)03/95] Wiper Blades *[SV23400(ALL)03/95] If the blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and the wiper blades. Use undiluted windshield washer solution or a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents to clean your wiper blades. These will damage your blades. *[SV23500(ALL)03/95] To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simply turn the ignition to the ACC position and turn your wipers on. Wait for them to reach a vertical position and turn the ignition to the OFF position. Do not move the wipers manually. Manually moving the wipers across the windshield may damage them. *[SV23600(ALL)03/01] *[SV23700(ALL)03/95] Wiper blade replacement [SV23705(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle uses a 24" wiper on the driver side and a 20" wiper on the passenger side. % Check the windshield wiper blades at least twice a year. Also check them whenever they seem less effective than usual. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades. If the wiper blades still do not work properly after you clean them, you may need to replace the wiper blade assembly or the blade element. When replacing the wiper blade assembly, blade refill, or wiper arm always use a Motorcraft part or equivalent. To replace the blades, follow the instructions that come with them. 285 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV23716(ALL)04/95] MicronAirH Air Filter Replacement *[SV23719(ALL)04/95] In your climate control system, you may have a filter that cleans the air before it enters the interior of the vehicle. This filter should be replaced at the intervals in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. [SV23723(ALL)04/95] To replace the MicronAirH air filter: [SV23725(ALL)04/95] 1. Open the hood. Move the vacuum hose at the rear passenger side of the engine compartment by pulling the hose clips off the leaf screen and removing the loose clip. With a coin or screwdriver, turn the four retainers on the leaf screen 90˚ and pull them straight out. Remove the leaf screen. [SV23730(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0001387-A Removing the vacuum hose clips 286 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV23735(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0001384-A Removing the leaf screen [SV23740(ALL)04/95] 2. With a wrench or socket, remove the two screws that hold the water shield. Move the water shield toward the center of the vehicle until there is enough clearance to remove it. [SV23745(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0001385-A Removing the water shield [SV23750(ALL)04/95] 3. Remove the old filter by sliding it forward out of the plastic tray then towards the center of the vehicle until there is enough clearance to remove it. [SV23755(ALL)04/95] 4. Install the new filter by compressing it and sliding it into the plastic tray. Push the left rear corner back and down to seat it in the tray. Push the other edges of the filter down to seat the filter completely. 287 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV23760(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0001386-A Installing the new filter [SV23765(ALL)04/95] 5. Reinstall the water shield, sliding it from the center of the vehicle toward the fender. As you position it over the filter, guide the hinged flap on the left side of the shield down between the filter and the fender. Slide the shield toward the fender until the holes on the shield align with the holes on the vehicle body. Reinstall the two screws that hold the shield in place. [SV23770(ALL)04/95] 6. Reinstall the leaf screen. Tuck the left rear corner of the screen under the top of the fender, then lower the screen into position. Reinstall the four retainers, turning them 90˚ to lock them into place. Reinstall the vacuum line hose clips and the one loose clip in the notches in the leaf screen. *[SV23800(ALL)03/95] *[SV23900(ALL)03/95] Tires % *[SV24200(ALL)03/95] Look at your tires each time you fill your fuel tank. If one tire looks lower than the others, check the pressure in all of them. Always follow these precautions: ❑ Keep your tires inflated to the recommended pressures. 288 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV24300(ALL)02/95] ❑ Stay within the recommended load limits (see *[SV24500(ALL)02/95] ❑ Make sure the weight of your load is evenly *[SV24550(ALL)10/89] *[SV24700(ALL)01/95] ❑ Drive at safe speeds. *[SV24800(ALL)01/95] Load limits in the Index). distributed. If you do not take these precautions, your tires may fail or go flat. RWARNING Ford Motor Company recommends obeying posted speed limits. Furthermore, driving too fast for conditions is dangerous and creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control which may result in personal injury. Under some circumstances, driving at very high speeds for extended periods of time may also result in damage to vehicle components, creating a risk of failure and potential loss of vehicle control. [SV24850(ALL)04/95] At least once a month, check the pressure in all your vehicle’s tires, including the spare. Use an accurate tire pressure gauge. Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle has been parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 3 miles (5 km). You can find the proper cold pressure and load limits of recommended size tires on the Tire Pressure Decal inside the glove compartment. 289 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV24900(ALL)08/95] RWARNING Over- or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control. [SV24925(ALL)04/95] Consistent high-speed driving [SV24950(ALL)02/95] RWARNING Ford Motor Company recommends obeying the posted speed limits. Driving too fast under certain conditions is dangerous and could cause loss of vehicle control or breakdown of certain vehicle components resulting in personal injury. [SV24975(ALL)02/95] In the event of continuous operation at high speed, the cold air pressure in all tires must be increased by 4 p.s.i. (28 kpa) when compared to the inflation pressure shown on the tire decal posted in the glove compartment. Under no circumstances should you exceed maximum tire inflation pressure which is molded on the tire outer side wall. [SV25025(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle has been equipped with proper speed rated tires to meet its speed capabilities. For further details, consult your Tire Warranty Booklet provided with the vehicle in the glove compartment. 290 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 % Tire Rotation [SV25200(ALL)11/94] Because your vehicle’s front and rear tires perform different jobs, they often wear differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate them as indicated in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. [SV25300(ALL)11/94] Rotate the tires according to the following diagram. Do not include the spare tire as part of your rotation. If you notice that the tires wear unevenly, have them checked. *[SV25100(ALL)02/95] [SV25410(ALL)11/94] one third page art:0001369-A Rotating the tires 291 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 % Replacing the Tires [SV25800(ALL)01/89] We recommend that you use all-weather tires when you replace your tires. *[SV25900(ALL)01/95] Replace any tires that show wear bands. When your tire shows a wear band, it has only 1/16 inch (1.59 mm) of tread left. *[SV25700(ALL)04/95] [SV26150(ALL)05/94] quarter page art:0001318-A A worn-out tire *[SV26175(ALL)01/95] Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly, you may need to replace them before a wear band appears across the entire tread. Some spots wear more heavily than others. *[SV26300(ALL)01/95] RWARNING When replacing full size tires, never mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the tire pressure decal. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations recommended on the decal. If you do not follow these precautions, your vehicle may not drive properly and safely. *[SV26400(ALL)01/95] Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires may also affect the accuracy of your speedometer. 292 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV27400(ALL)02/95] *[SV27500(ALL)01/95] Information About Tire Quality Grades *[SV27550(ALL)01/95] Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2). *[SV27600(ALL)01/95] U.S. Department of Transportation — Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. *[SV27799(ALL)01/95] *[SV27800(ALL)01/95] Treadwear % New vehicles are fitted with tires that have their Tire Quality Grade (described below) molded into the tire’s sidewall. These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set. The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. 293 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV27999(ALL)01/95] *[SV28000(ALL)01/95] Traction A B C *[SV28299(ALL)01/95] *[SV28300(ALL)01/95] Temperature A B C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 294 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV28500(ALL)04/95] *[SV28600(ALL)01/95] *[SV28700(ALL)01/95] Snow Tires and Chains The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads that provide traction in rain or snow. However, during the winter months in some climates, you may need to use snow tires and occasionally chains for your tires. RWARNING If you use snow tires, make sure that they are the same size and grade as the tires you now have on your vehicle. If they are not, your vehicle may not handle safely. *[SV28775(ALL)02/95] Use chains on the tires only in an emergency or if the law requires them where you live. If you choose to use chains on your vehicle’s tires, be aware of the following: *[SV28825(ALL)11/94] ❑ Tire chains may scratch or chip aluminum *[SV28925(ALL)11/94] ❑ Local regulations may prohibit or restrict the *[SV28950(ALL)08/94] ❑ Put the chains on the front tires tightly with wheels. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TIRE CHAINS ARE INSTALLED ON STEEL WHEELS ONLY. Be sure to remove wheel covers (if equipped) from steel rims before using tire chains to avoid scratches or damage. use of tire chains. Investigate the laws and regulations in your area before installing chains. the ends held down securely. Retighten the chains after driving 1/2 mile (1 km). Follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. 295 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV28975(ALL)08/94] ❑ Do not drive faster than 30 *[SV29025(ALL)11/94] ❑ Tire chains may affect vehicle handling. Drive *[SV29050(ALL)11/94] ❑ Do not use chains on temporary spare tires. *[SV29150(ALL)05/94] ❑ Remove tire chains at the first opportunity *[SV29160(ALL)04/95] *[SV29170(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Wheels *[SV29180(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out if the brushes are abrasive. *[SV29220(ALL)04/95] Air Filter [SV29240(ALL)02/95] To replace the engine air filter, unclip the two latches, separate the housing and remove the old filter. Wipe the interior of the housing clean before inserting the new filter. Lock the two latches. [SV29260(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Do not use oil-impregnated air filters. Filters other than the ones specified in this Owner Guide can cause engine damage. Your warranties may not apply if your vehicle is damaged because you used the wrong air filter. See Motorcraft parts in the Index. % mph (50 km/h) or the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is lower. Avoid bumps, holes and sharp turns. If you can hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle, remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle. carefully and avoid hard braking. They may damage the vehicle and the tire. after using them on snow and ice. Do not use the chains on dry roads. Wash the wheels with the same detergent you use to wash your vehicle’s body. Do not use acid based wheel cleaners, steel wool, abrasives, fuel, or strong detergents. These substances will damage the protective coatings. Use tar and road oil remover to remove grease and tar. 296 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 % *[SV29300(ALL)03/01] *[SV29310(ALL)03/95] Automatic Transaxle Fluid Under normal circumstances, you do not need to check the fluid level of the transaxle, since your vehicle does not use up transaxle fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet for replacement intervals. However, if the transaxle is not working properly — for instance, the transaxle may slip or shift slowly, or you may notice some sign of fluid leakage — the fluid level should be checked. *[SV29340(ALL)02/93] *[SV29350(ALL)02/95] Checking the Automatic Transaxle Fluid *[SV29370(ALL)01/95] Wipe off the dipstick cap and pull the dipstick out. Wipe the indicator end clean. Put the dipstick back into the filler tube and make sure it is fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and read the fluid level. % With the vehicle on a level surface and the brake pedal fully applied, start the engine and move the gearshift selector through all of the gears. Allow sufficient time for each position to engage. Securely latch the gearshift selector in the P (Park) position. Fully set the parking brake and leave the engine running. [SV29380(ALL)04/95] one inch art:0000717-E Automatic overdrive transaxle fluid dipstick 297 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV29388(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Your vehicle should not be driven until some fluid has been added if the fluid level is below the bottom hole on the dipstick and the outside temperature is above 50˚F (10˚C). Add only enough fluid to bring the level above the bottom hole. [SV29395(ALL)04/95] If the vehicle has not been driven and the fluid level is above the bottom hole on the dipstick, do not add fluid. Recheck the fluid level after your vehicle has reached normal operating temperature. *[SV29396(ALL)02/95] Normal operating temperature is reached after driving approximately 20 miles (32 km). The fluid level should be within the crosshatched area on the dipstick. *[SV29397(ALL)01/95] NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds, driven in city traffic during hot weather, or has been pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow the fluid to cool before checking. *[SV29400(ALL)01/95] *[SV29410(ALL)01/95] Adding Automatic Transaxle Fluid [SV29415(ALL)04/93] Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25L) increments through the filler tube to bring the level within the crosshatched area on the dipstick. If the level is above the top hole on the dipstick, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified technician. % Before adding any fluid, be sure that the correct type will be used. Correct type is shown on the dipstick. 298 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV29425(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call your local recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids. *[SV30200(ALL)03/95] *[SV30300(ALL)04/95] Brake Fluid % *[SV30400(ALL)06/93] % *[SV30450(ALL)01/95] Under normal circumstances, your vehicle should not use up brake fluid rapidly. However, expect the level of the brake fluid to slowly fall as you put more mileage on your vehicle and the brake lining wears. You should check the brake fluid at every scheduled engine oil change, but be sure to check it at least once a year. You can do this by looking at the fluid level in the plastic reservoir on the master cylinder. (See The Engine Types in this chapter to locate the master cylinder.) The fluid level should be at or near the MAX mark. RWARNING Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. *[SV30500(ALL)03/95] If the fluid is low, carefully clean and remove the cap from the reservoir. Fill the reservoir to the MAX line with Ford High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AA or equivalent DOT 3 fluid meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A. 299 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV30800(ALL)01/95] RWARNING If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause permanent damage to your brakes. *[SV30900(ALL)01/95] *[SV31000(ALL)01/95] Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line. If you find that the fluid level is excessively low — below the seam or ridge on the outside of the plastic reservoir — have the brake system inspected. *[SV31100(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry. This may cause the brakes to fail. [SV31140(ALL)11/94] one third page art:0000672-B The brake fluid reservoir 300 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 % *[SV31200(ALL)03/95] *[SV31300(ALL)01/95] Power Steering Fluid Check the level of the power steering fluid at least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall). % Checking and Adding Power Steering Fluid *[SV31500(ALL)02/95] 1. Start the engine and let it run until the power steering fluid reaches normal operating temperature. The power steering fluid will be at the right temperature when the engine coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster is near the center of the NORMAL operating temperature range. *[SV31600(ALL)01/95] 2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel back and forth several times. Make sure that the cap assembly is installed at this time. *[SV31700(ALL)01/95] 3. Then turn the engine off. [SV31800(ALL)04/95] 3.0L Vulcan engine: *[SV31400(ALL)03/95] % 4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick (which is highlighted in yellow in your vehicle). The fluid level should be between the arrows in the FULL HOT range, which is marked on the side of the dipstick, opposite the side marked FULL COLD. Do not add fluid if the level is within the FULL HOT range. *[SV32100(ALL)07/94] 5. If the power steering fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking the level, until you reach the FULL HOT range. Do not overfill. *[SV31900(ALL)03/94] 301 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV32150(ALL)02/95] half page art:0000311-C Dipstick for power steering fluid (3.0L Vulcan) *[SV32175(ALL)03/95] 6. [SV32225(ALL)04/95] 3.0L Duratec engine: *[SV32250(ALL)11/94] 4. Check the fluid level in the power steering fluid reservoir. The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX lines on the side of the reservoir. *[SV32300(ALL)11/94] 5. If the power steering fluid is below the MIN mark, add fluid in small amounts until the level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the side of the reservoir. 302 When you are finished, put the dipstick back in and make sure that it fits snugly. File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV32375(ALL)02/95] half page art:0001388-A Reservoir for power steering fluid (3.0L Duratec) [SV32400(ALL)04/95] Use only MerconH ATF power steering fluid. *[SV32700(ALL)01/95] If the power steering fluid is low, do not drive your vehicle for a long period of time before adding fluid. This can damage the power steering pump. [SV32800(ALL)04/95] If you check the power steering fluid when it is cold, make sure that the fluid reaches the FULL COLD range on the dipstick (3.0L Vulcan) or MIN on the reservoir (3.0L Duratec). The reading will only be accurate if the fluid temperature is approximately 50˚F to 85˚F (10˚C to 30˚C). 303 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV32910(ALL)02/95] Fuses and Relays [SV32915(ALL)04/95] Fuses (conventional and high current) and relays protect your vehicle’s wiring system from overloading. If electrical parts in your vehicle are not working, the system may have been overloaded and blown a fuse. Before you replace or repair any electrical parts, check the appropriate circuit protector. High current fuses should only be repaired or replaced by your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. [SV33400(ALL)02/95] The following charts tell you which circuit protector protects each electrical part of your vehicle. If a fuse blows, all the parts of your vehicle that use the circuit will not work. *[SV33410(ALL)02/95] Once you have determined which fuses to check, follow the procedures under Checking and replacing fuses later in this chapter. *[SV33500(ALL)05/93] RWARNING Always remove the key from the ignition before working on or replacing fuses. Failure to do so could result in injury. 304 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV33600(ALL)11/94] The instrument panel fuses and relays [SV33935(ALL)11/94] half page art:0001081-B The instrument panel fuse panel location 305 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV33940(ALL)08/95] full page art:0001082-E The instrument panel fuse cover 306 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV33950(ALL)08/95] thirty-two pica chart:0001084-F 307 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV33960(ALL)08/94] thirty-four pica chart:0001086-E 308 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV33975(ALL)11/94] *[SV33985(ALL)01/95] The power distribution box fuses and relays RWARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses. Ford recommends that high current fuses be replaced by a qualified technician. [SV33986(ALL)11/94] half page art:0001089-B The power distribution box location 309 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV33990(ALL)02/95] full page art:0001090-B The power distribution box 310 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV33995(ALL)08/94] thirty-two pica chart:0001091-E 311 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV35200(ALL)03/95] *[SV35300(ALL)02/95] Checking and Replacing Fuses [SV35400(ALL)11/94] 1. Lift the handle of the fuse panel or power distribution box to unlatch the cover. [SV35600(ALL)11/94] 2. On the cover, find the fuse you want to check. The diagram on the cover tells you where to locate the fuse on the panel. [SV35900(ALL)11/94] 3. Check the fuse to see if it is blown. To remove the fuse, use the pulling tool attached to the inside cover of the fuse panel. Look through the clear side of the fuse to see if the metal wire inside is separated. If it is, the fuse should be replaced. % If you need to check a fuse, follow these steps: *[SV36000(ALL)11/94] quarter page art:0030248-A Fuse puller tool and fuse 312 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV36100(ALL)11/94] 4. Replace the fuse with one that has the right amperage rating. (See the following chart.) [SV36200(ALL)04/95] six pica chart:0001443-A [SV36250(ALL)04/95] fourteen pica chart:0001468-A *[SV36300(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Always replace a fuse with one that has the right amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could possibly start a fire. [SV36400(ALL)11/94] 5. Put the cover back on. *[SV36600(ALL)05/93] Even after you replace a fuse, it will continue to blow if you do not find what caused the overload. If the fuse continues to blow, have your electrical system checked. 313 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV37500(ALL)03/95] *[SV37600(ALL)01/95] The Lights *[SV37700(ALL)01/95] *[SV37800(ALL)01/95] *[SV37900(ALL)01/95] *[SV37950(ALL)02/95] *[SV38000(ALL)01/95] *[SV38100(ALL)01/95] *[SV38200(ALL)01/95] *[SV38300(ALL)01/95] % [SV38400(ALL)01/95] * ❑ headlamps ❑ tail lamps ❑ brakelamps ❑ high-mount brakelamp ❑ hazard flasher ❑ turn signals ❑ side markers ❑ license plate lamp It is a good idea to check the operation of the following lights frequently: The alignment of your headlamps should be checked if: *[SV38500(ALL)01/95] ❑ oncoming motorists frequently signal you to *[SV38600(ALL)01/95] ❑ the headlamps do not seem to give you *[SV38700(ALL)11/92] ❑ the headlamps are not aligned so that they turn off your vehicle’s high beams when you do not have the high beams on enough light to see clearly at night point slightly down and to the right. 314 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV38800(ALL)03/95] *[SV38900(ALL)01/95] % Replacing the Headlamp Bulb The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceable bulbs. When the lamp burns out, simply replace the bulb, rather than the whole lamp. *[SV39000(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully. It may shatter if it is scratched or dropped. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass part. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. Keep the bulb out of children’s reach. *[SV39100(ALL)01/95] Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless you can immediately replace it with a new one. If a bulb is removed for an extended period of time, contaminants may enter the headlamp housing and affect its performance. [SV39250(ALL)11/92] one third page art:0000345-A Parts of a headlamp 315 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV39300(ALL)03/95] *[SV39350(ALL)08/95] To remove the headlamp bulb: 1. Make sure that the headlamp knob is in the OFF position. [SV39401(ALL)04/95] 2. Lift the hood. If you are replacing the driver’s side headlamp, unclip the electronic module on the right side of the battery and move it out of the way. Find the bulb in the headlamp socket. [SV39425(ALL)04/95] one third page art:0001437-A The module behind the driver’s side headlamp *[SV39450(ALL)02/95] 3. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling the connector. *[SV39501(ALL)02/95] 4. Remove the bulb retaining ring by rotating it counterclockwise (when viewed from the rear) about an eighth of a turn to free it from the bulb socket, and by sliding the ring off the plastic base. Keep the ring. It is to be used again to retain the new bulb. [SV39550(ALL)02/95] 5. Carefully remove the bulb from its socket by gently pulling it straight back out of the socket. Do not turn the bulb while you remove it. 316 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV39601(ALL)03/95] *[SV39650(ALL)02/95] To install a bulb: 1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base facing upward, insert the glass end of the bulb into the socket. You may need to turn the bulb left or right to line up the grooves in the plastic base with the tabs in the socket. When the grooves are aligned, push the bulb into the socket until the plastic base contacts the rear of the socket. *[SV39701(ALL)02/95] 2. Slip the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base until it contacts the rear of the socket. Lock the ring into the socket by rotating it clockwise until you feel a “stop”. *[SV39750(ALL)02/95] 3. Push the electrical connector into the rear of the plastic base until it snaps, locking it into position. *[SV39800(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure that they work properly. If the headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you should not need to align it again. % Aiming Headlamps [SV39901(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a Vehicle Headlamp Aim Device (VHAD) on the headlamp reflector extension and headlamp housing. Each headlamp may be properly aimed in the horizontal direction (left/right) and the vertical direction (up/down) by performing the steps outlined in the following paragraphs. The horizontal aim must be adjusted first. *[SV39950(ALL)02/95] Tools required: One 4mm box wrench or open end wrench. *[SV39850(ALL)02/95] 317 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV40050(ALL)04/95] Position the vehicle on a surface that is level on the front-to-rear direction. [SV40075(ALL)04/95] If the vehicle cannot be placed on a true level surface, the headlamps still can be adjusted using the VHAD if the slope of the surface is accurately known and does not differ by more than 1.2" from true level. A difference of 2.27 inches in height of the surface between the front and rear wheels corresponds to 1.2" slope. [SV40100(ALL)04/95] If the vertical adjuster is within +/s 4 graduations about zero, the vertical headlamp aim is within specification; and if the horizontal adjuster is within +/s 2 graduations about zero, the horizontal headlamp aim is within specification. [SV40125(ALL)04/95] half page art:0001425-A 318 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV40201(ALL)02/95] Horizontal aim adjustment [SV40250(ALL)04/95] 1. Open the hood and locate the horizontal indicator and adjusting screw. *[SV40375(ST)04/95] 2. Use a 4mm wrench to turn the horizontal adjusting screw until the reference mark on the reflector extension aligns with the “0” reference mark on the horizontal indicator when viewed from directly above. If the vehicle has been in an accident requiring the front end of the vehicle to be repaired, the horizontal indicator should be recalibrated by a servicing facility using the Taurus/Sable Service Manual instructions. *[SV40501(ALL)02/95] *[SV40601(ALL)02/95] Vertical aim adjustment 1. With the hood open, locate the bubble level vertical aim indicator. It is visible when viewed from above and to the rear of the headlamp. *[SV40650(ALL)02/95] 2. [SV40725(ALL)04/95] 3. With the vehicle on a level surface, use a 4mm wrench to turn the vertical aim adjustment screw (outboard screw) located on the back of the lamp assembly clockwise or counterclockwise until the bubble in the spirit level is centered when viewed from directly above the bubble. Close the hood. *[SV40750(ALL)02/95] If the vehicle is on a downward or upward slope of not more than 1.2˚, the VHAD’s bubble level can be used to correct for the effects of the surface slope, provided that the slope is accurately known. *[SV40775(ALL)02/95] Each graduation of the bubble level represents 0.19˚ of downward or upward slope. To correct for the effects of a surface slope, turn the vertical aim adjustment screw until the bubble is centered at a position corresponding to the slope of the surface. 319 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV40800(ALL)02/95] Each 0.1 inch difference in surface height between the front and the rear wheels corresponds to 0.053˚ of surface slope; each 0.19˚ of surface slope corresponds to 0.36 inches difference in surface height between the front and rear wheels. [SV40820(ALL)02/95] Replacing the High-Mount Brakelamp Bulb [SV40830(ALL)04/95] If you have the sedan, your vehicle has a brakelamp mounted in the rear window, called a high-mount brakelamp. The wagon has a high-mount brakelamp on the outside. You may need to remove this lamp to replace the brakelamp bulb. [SV40832(ALL)11/94] one third page art:0000623-D Parts of the high-mount brakelamp (sedan) [SV40835(ALL)11/94] Sedan *[SV40840(ALL)03/95] To remove the brakelamp: [SV40842(ALL)11/94] 1. Remove the package tray trim. [SV40844(ALL)11/94] 2. Push the attachment toward the rear window. [SV40846(ALL)11/94] 3. Slide the brakelamp up and away from the rear window to remove it from the tabs that hold it down. [SV40849(ALL)11/94] 4. Disconnect the bulbs. 320 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV40850(ALL)11/94] To install the brakelamp: [SV40855(ALL)11/94] 1. Install the bulbs. [SV40860(ALL)11/94] 2. Position the brakelamp over the tab slots and line up the tabs with the tab slots. [SV40865(ALL)11/94] 3. Push down and toward the rear window to engage the tabs. [SV40870(ALL)11/94] 4. Push attachment toward the rear window and line up the slot in the attachment with the edge of the sheet metal hole. [SV40875(ALL)11/94] 5. Release the attachment slot onto the sheet metal hole. [SV40878(ALL)02/95] 6. Replace the package tray trim. [SV40880(ALL)11/94] Wagon [SV40885(ALL)02/95] one third page art:0001396-A Parts of the high-mount brakelamp (wagon) 321 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV40890(ALL)03/95] To remove the brakelamp: [SV40895(ALL)11/94] 1. Remove the interior trim panel. [SV40905(ALL)11/94] 2. Remove the four attachment nuts that hold the brakelamp in place. [SV40910(ALL)11/94] 3. Lift the whole assembly off of the vehicle from the outside. [SV40915(ALL)11/94] 4. Disconnect the bulbs. [SV40920(ALL)11/94] To install the brakelamp: [SV40925(ALL)11/94] 1. Install the bulbs. [SV40930(ALL)11/94] 2. Position the brakelamp into the tailgate holes. [SV40935(ALL)11/94] 3. From the inside of the vehicle, install and tighten the four nuts that hold the brakelamp in place. [SV40940(ALL)11/94] 4. Install the interior trim panel. 322 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV40950(ALL)11/94] Using the right bulbs [SV40970(S )04/95] thirty-two pica chart:0000326-H 323 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 % *[SV41000(ALL)03/95] *[SV41100(ALL)03/95] Emission Control System Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter which enables your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emissions requirements. *[SV41200(ALL)01/95] RWARNING It is important for your safety and the efficient operation of your vehicle that the engine and exhaust system operate properly. Exhaust leaks may result in the entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes, particularly carbon monoxide, into the passenger compartment. In addition, malfunctions in the engine or exhaust system can result in excessive exhaust system temperatures. Under extreme conditions (for example, towing a trailer up a steep hill on a very hot day with a malfunctioning engine or exhaust system), excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the fuel system, the interior floor covering, or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire and resulting in personal injury. *[SV41300(ALL)01/95] To make sure that the catalytic converter and the other emissions control parts continue to work properly: *[SV41400(ALL)01/95] *[SV41500(ALL)01/95] *[SV41600(ALL)01/95] ❑ Use only unleaded fuel. ❑ Avoid running out of fuel. ❑ Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds. 324 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV41700(ALL)03/95] ❑ Have the services listed in your Maintenance *[SV41710(ALL)03/95] The Scheduled Maintenance Services listed in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet are required because they are considered essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system. *[SV41720(ALL)03/95] % *[SV41800(ALL)03/95] Schedule and Record booklet performed according to the specified schedule. Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine Ford replacement parts. If other than Ford or Motorcraft parts or Ford authorized remanufactured parts are used for maintenance replacements or for the service of components affecting emissions control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. It is the owner’s responsibility to determine the equivalency of such parts. Please consult your warranty booklet for complete warranty information. RWARNING Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emissions system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. 325 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 [SV41900(ALL)04/95] Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, loss of oil pressure, the charging system warning light, the service engine soon light, or the temperature warning light. These sometimes indicate that the emissions system is not working properly. *[SV42000(ALL)01/95] Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. Changes that cause more unburned fuel to reach the exhaust system can increase the temperature of the engine or exhaust system. *[SV42100(ALL)01/95] By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. In some of the United States and in Canada, vehicle owners may be liable if their emission control device is removed or is prevented from working. *[SV42200(ALL)02/92] Never use a metal exhaust collector when you service your vehicle. If the metal collector contacts any of your vehicle’s plastic trim or bumper parts they could melt or deform. *[SV42300(ALL)01/95] Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operate properly. See your dealer if the engine runs on for more than five seconds after you shut it off or if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires. *[SV42400(ALL)02/95] % Information about your vehicle’s emission control system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information decal located on or near the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune-up specifications. 326 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 % Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance Testing *[SV42410(ALL)03/95] In some localities it may become a legal requirement to pass an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system. If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced, the OBD II system is reset to a not ready for I/M testing condition. To prepare for I/M testing, the law specifies a “need for additional mixed city and highway driving to complete the check” of the OBD II system. As soon as all of the OBD II system checks are successfully completed, the OBD II system is set to the ready condition. The amount of driving required to reach the ready condition varies with individual driving patterns. To complete this requirement in the minimum amount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycle defined below. If the vehicle owner cannot or does not want to do the additional driving required by law, a service center can perform this drive cycle as it would any other type of repair work. *[SV42420(ALL)03/95] *[SV42430(ALL)04/95] OBD II Drive Cycle *[SV42440(ALL)03/95] Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. [SV42445(ALL)04/95] The engine must be warmed up and at operating temperature before proceeding with the drive modes of the following OBD II Drive Cycle. *[SV42450(ALL)04/95] 1. *[SV42405(ALL)03/95] The following steps must be run in the order shown. If any steps are interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is acceptable between steps. Start the engine. Drive or idle (in neutral) the vehicle for 4 minutes. 327 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV42460(ALL)04/95] *[SV42465(ALL)04/95] 2. Idle the vehicle in Drive for 40 seconds. 3. Accelerate the vehicle to 45 mph (72 km/h) at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle for 10 seconds. *[SV42471(ALL)04/95] 4. Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at 45 mph (72 km/h) for 30 seconds. [SV42475(ALL)04/95] 5. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds. *[SV42481(ALL)04/95] 6. Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic at speeds between 25 and 40 mph (40-64 km/h) for 15 minutes. During the 15 minute drive cycle the following modes must be achieved: *[SV42485(ALL)04/95] a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10 seconds each *[SV42491(ALL)04/95] b. acceleration from idles at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle position, and *[SV42495(ALL)04/95] c. choose 3 different speeds to do 1.5 minute steady state throttle drives. *[SV42500(ALL)04/95] 7. Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and 60 mph (72-97 km/h). This should take approximately 5 minutes. *[SV42505(ALL)04/95] 8. Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady at the selected speed between 45 and 60 mph (72-97 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes. *[SV42510(ALL)04/95] 9. Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varying speeds between 45 and 60 mph (72-97 km/h). *[SV42515(ALL)04/95] 10. Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in drive for 40 seconds. *[SV42601(ALL)04/95] 11. OBD II drive cycle has been completed. Vehicle can be turned off when convenient. 328 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV42650(ALL)03/95] *[SV42700(ALL)03/95] % Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts, and Lubricant Specifications Refill Capacities [SV42730(ALL)04/95] twenty-two pica chart:0000328-L 329 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV42800(ALL)01/95] % Motorcraft Parts [SV42930(ALL)04/95] eighteen pica chart:0000330-K 330 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV42980(ALL)03/95] % Lubricant Specifications [SV43000(ALL)04/95] twenty-two pica chart:0000720-S 331 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 % *[SV44000(ALL)01/95] *[SV44100(ALL)01/95] *[SV44150(ALL)01/95] Vehicle Storage Maintenance Tips If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time (60 days or more), refer to the following maintenance recommendations to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating condition. *[SV44200(ALL)01/95] *[SV44300(ALL)01/95] *[SV44400(ALL)01/95] *[SV44500(ALL)01/95] General *[SV44600(ALL)01/95] *[SV44700(ALL)01/95] Body *[SV44800(ALL)01/95] ❑ Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed *[SV44900(ALL)01/95] ❑ Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent *[SV45000(ALL)01/95] ❑ Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a [SV45100(ALL)04/95] ❑ Lubricate all hood, door and trunk latches ❑ Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place. ❑ Protect from sunlight, if possible. ❑ If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage. ❑ Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces, rear wheel housing and underside of front fenders. locations. rust. thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is washed. with a light grade oil. [SV45150(ALL)04/95] ❑ Lubricate trunk lid or wagon liftgate hinges with a light grade oil. (Do not lubricate hood and door hinges.) 332 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV45200(ALL)01/95] *[SV45300(ALL)01/95] ❑ Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading. ❑ Keep all rubber parts free from oil and *[SV45350(ALL)01/95] *[SV45400(ALL)01/95] Engine *[SV45500(ALL)01/95] ❑ With your foot on the brake, shift through all *[SV45600(ALL)01/95] *[SV45700(ALL)07/94] Fuel system *[SV45900(ALL)03/95] NOTE: During extended periods of vehicle storage (60 days or more), fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. This can damage rubber and other polymers in the fuel system and may also clog small orifices. *[SV46000(ALL)01/95] Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added whenever actual or expected storage periods exceed 60 days. Follow the instructions on the label. The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive throughout the fuel system. *[SV46100(ALL)01/95] A volatile corrosion inhibitor added to the fuel system will protect the fuel system’s inner surfaces from corrosion. Follow the instructions packaged with the product. % % solvents. ❑ Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal operating temperature. the gears while the engine is running. ❑ Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle. 333 File:fcsvs.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:36:55 1995 *[SV46200(ALL)01/95] *[SV46300(ALL)01/95] *[SV46400(ALL)01/95] *[SV46500(ALL)01/95] *[SV46600(ALL)01/95] % *[SV46650(ALL)02/95] % Cooling system ❑ Protect against freezing temperatures. Battery ❑ Check and recharge as necessary. ❑ Keep connections clean and covered with a light coat of grease. ❑ If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery, disconnect the battery cables to ensure battery charge is maintained for quick starting. NOTE: If battery cables are disconnected, it will be necessary to reset any memory features (eg. radio presets). *[SV46700(ALL)01/95] *[SV46800(ALL)01/95] Brakes *[SV46900(ALL)01/95] *[SV47000(ALL)01/95] *[SV47100(ALL)01/95] *[SV47200(ALL)01/95] Tires *[SV47300(ALL)08/95] ❑ Move vehicles at least 25 feet (10 m) every 15 % % ❑ Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released. ❑ Maintain recommended air pressure. Miscellaneous ❑ Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and clevis pins under vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust. days to lubricate working parts to prevent corrosion. 334 File:fcqis.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:48 1995 [QI00750(ALL)04/95] full page art:0001469-A Warning label locations 335 File:fcqis.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:48 1995 [QI01200(S )03/95] full page art:0001070-D Front Exterior View — Sedan/Wagon Typical 336 File:fcqis.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:48 1995 [QI01400(S )03/95] full page art:0001072-E Rear Exterior View Sedan 337 File:fcqis.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:48 1995 [QI01600(S )03/95] full page art:0001071-D Rear Exterior View Wagon 338 File:fcqis.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:48 1995 [QI01900(S )03/95] full page art:0001074-D Entrance View (Console Shift Shown — Column Shift Similar) 339 File:fcqis.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:48 1995 [QI02300(S )03/95] full page art:0001075-D Driver’s Door 340 File:fcqis.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:48 1995 [QI02500(S )03/95] full page art:0001088-D 341 Instrument Panel (Column Shift Shown — Console Shift Similar) File:fcqis.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:48 1995 [QI02700(S )03/95] full page art:0001076-E Instrument Cluster 342 File:fcqis.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:48 1995 [QI03000(S )03/95] full page art:0001078-C Trunk 343 File:fcqis.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:48 1995 [QI03200(S )03/95] full page art:0001079-D Wagon Cargo Area 344 File:fcqis.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:48 1995 [QI03400(S )03/95] full page art:0001080-D 3.0L Vulcan Engine Compartment 345 File:fcqis.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:48 1995 [QI03600(S )03/95] full page art:0001440-A 3.0L Duratec Engine Compartment 346 File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 Index A ABS warning light (see Anti-lock brake system) . . . . . . Accessory position on the ignition . . . . Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . . . Air bag supplemental restraint system description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . proper seating . . . . . . . . . . . . tone generator . . . . . . . . . . . . wearing safety belts . . . . . . . . . . Air cleaner filter location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning electronic automatic temperature control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . manual heating and air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm, activating remote personal . . . . Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . Anti-lock brake system (ABS) description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-theft lug nuts and key . . . . . . . Anti-theft system triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio system (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . Autolamp system (see Headlamps) . . . . . . 83 61 273 . . . . . . . . 23 32 23 79 28 24 31 23 261 296 . 95 . 93 135 276 . . 204 83 230 137 90 169 108 Index 347 File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 Automatic transaxle driving with . . . . fluid, adding . . . . fluid, checking . . . fluid, refill capacities fluid, specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, . . . . 196 298 297 329 331 . . . . . . 4 . . . . B Basic vehicle warranty . . . . . Battery acid, treating emergencies . . battery saver . . . . . . . . charging system warning light disconnecting . . . . . . . . jumping a disabled battery . . proper disposal, recycling . . replacement, specifications . . servicing . . . . . . . . . . when storing your vehicle . . Brake fluid brake warning light . . . . . checking and adding . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . Brakelamp high-mount brakelamp . . . lamp out warning light . . . Brakes anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light. . . . applying the brakes . . . . . brake warning light . . . . . fluid, checking and adding . . fluid, refill capacities . . . . fluid, specifications . . . . . new brake linings . . . . . . noise. . . . . . . . . . . . parking . . . . . . . . . . trailer . . . . . . . . . . . when storing your vehicle . . 348 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 . 113 . . 76 . 282 . 217 . 283 . 330 . 282 . 334 . . . . . . 75 . . . . . 299 . . . . . 331 . . . . . 320 . . . . . . 89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 . . 83 . 203 . . 75 . 299 . 329 . 331 . . 5 . 204 . 205 . 215 . 334 File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 Brake-shift interlock . . . Break-in period . . . . . Bulbs, replacing headlamps . . . . . . high-mount brakelamp specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 197 . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 320 323 C Canada, customer assistance . . . . . . Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacities for refilling fluids . . . . . . Carbon monoxide in exhaust . . . . . . Cargo cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Car seats for children (see Child safety seats) . . . . . . . Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . CD player (see Electronic sound system) . . . . Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . Charging system warning light . . . . . Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . Child safety restraints . . . . . . . . . child safety belts . . . . . . . . . . child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . Child safety seats and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . attaching with tether straps . . . . . automatic locking mode (retractor) . . in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . . Chime headlamps on . . . . . . . . . . . key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning your vehicle built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . CD player and discs . . . . . . . . chrome and aluminum parts . . . . . . 243 . 244 . 329 . . 71 . 162 . 162 . . 34 . 324 . . . . . . . . . . 181 221 76 125 32 59 34 . . . . . . . . . . 34 46 13 37 37 . . . . . . 79 62 75 . . . 59 . 186 . . 8 Index 349 File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 Cleaning your vehicle (continued) engine compartment. . . . . . exterior . . . . . . . . . . . headlamps . . . . . . . . . . instrument panel . . . . . . . mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . plastic parts . . . . . . . . . polishing . . . . . . . . . . . rustproofing . . . . . . . . . safety belts . . . . . . . . . . tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . washing . . . . . . . . . . . wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . windows . . . . . . . . . . . Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cold engine starting . . . . . . . Compact disc player (see Electronic system). . . . . . . . . . . . Console, description . . . . . . . Coolant (see Engine coolant) checking and adding . . . . . drain and flush . . . . . . . . preparing for storage . . . . . refill capacities . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . temperature gauge . . . . . . Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control (see Speed control) . Cupholder(s) . . . . . . . . . . Customer Assistance Center, Ford (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . Customer Assistance Centre, Ford of Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 7 108 91 154 8 7 8 23 108 7 296 105 114 65 181 156 . 276 . 281 . 334 . 281 . 331 . . 84 . 256 . 120 . 157 . . . . 238 . . . . 238 . . . . . . 107 D Daytime running light system Defrost rear window and side view windshield . . . . . . . . Dispute Settlement Board . . 350 Index mirrors. . . 104 . . . . 95, 102 . . . . . . 239 File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 Doors door ajar warning light . . . lubricant specifications . . . Driving under special conditions heavy load . . . . . . . . . high speed . . . . . . . . . high water . . . . . . . . . slippery roads . . . . . . . towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . . . . 331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 290 209 207 212 E Electrical system fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . operating when the engine is off . relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic sound system accessory delay . . . . . . . . . radio reception . . . . . . . . . tuning the radio . . . . . . . . warranty and service information Electronic stereo cassette radio (see Electronic sound system) . . Electronic stereo radio (see Electronic sound system) . . Emergencies, roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . battery acid spills . . . . . . . . jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency brake (parking brake) . . Emission control system catalytic converter . . . . . . . emissions warranty . . . . . . . Engine fuel pump shut-off switch . . . . service points . . . . . . . . . starting . . . . . . . . . . . . starting after a collision . . . . . storing your vehicle. . . . . . . Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . 304 . . . . 61 . . . 304 . . . . . . . . . . 61 . 176 . 172 . 190 . . . 172 . . . 172 . . . . . . . . . . 235 218 217 232 205 . . . . . . 324 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 260 . 64 . 68 333 . 67 Index 351 File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 Engine coolant checking and adding . . . . . . checking hoses . . . . . . . . . preparing for storage . . . . . . recovery reservoir . . . . . . . . refill capacities . . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge, description . . . . . . . . . . . Engine fan . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil changing oil and oil filter . . . . checking and adding . . . . . . dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . engine oil pressure warning light . filter, specifications . . . . . . . refill capacities . . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . . synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . . “break-in” oils . . . . . . . . . Entry system, keyless . . . . . . . Exhaust fumes . . . . . . . . . . Extended Service Plan, Ford . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 277 334 276 329 331 . . . . 84 . . . 256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 . 116 . 221 . 152 . 329 . 238 . 239 . . 5 . 243 . . . . 275 274 274 77 330 329 331 273 6 128 71 5 F Flashers, hazard . . . . . . . . . . Flashing the lights . . . . . . . . . Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid refill capacities . . . . . . . . Ford Customer Assistance Center . . Ford Dispute Settlement Board . . . Ford Extended Service Plan . . . . Ford Motor Company of Canada . . Ford of Canada Customer Assistance Centre . . . . . . . . Foreign registration . . . . . . . . French owner guides, how to obtain Fuel calculating fuel economy. . . . . 352 Index . . . 243 . . . 245 . . . . 3 . . . 270 File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 Fuel (continued) capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . filling your vehicle with fuel. . . . . filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . treating emergencies . . . . . . . . Fuel cap removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . . . . Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut-off switch, starting after collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse panels instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . power distribution box . . . . . . . Fuses, checking and replacing . . . . . . 329 . 263 . 330 . . 84 . 265 . 270 . 333 . 268 . 263 . 265 . 330 . . 84 a . . 68 . . . 305 309 312 . . . . . . . . . 263 270 263 G Gas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . . Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) . . Gasoline (see Fuel) . . . . . . . . Gauges, Mechanical engine coolant temperature gauge fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . odometer . . . . . . . . . . . speedometer . . . . . . . . . . tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . trip odometer . . . . . . . . . GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) definition . . . . . . . . . . . location . . . . . . . . . . . . Gearshift column-mounted . . . . . . . . console-mounted . . . . . . . . locking the gearshift . . . . . . shift-lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 84 85 85 86 86 209 209 . . . 193 . . . 199 . . . . 61 . 192, 197 Index 353 File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 209 H Hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlamps aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . autolamp system . . . . . . . . . . . bulb specification . . . . . . . . . . . checking alignment . . . . . . . . . . daytime running lights . . . . . . . . flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . turning on and off . . . . . . . . . . warning chime . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heated mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating electronic automatic temperature control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . manual heating and air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High beams indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-mount brakelamp, replacing the bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood latch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . lubrication specifications . . . . . . . . release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hoses, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Index 118 317 108 323 314 107 116 115 315 106 . 79 145 104 . 95 . 93 . 78 107 320 214 258 331 258 119 277 File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 I Idle relearning . . . . . . . . . speed . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition positions of the ignition . . . removing the key . . . . . . Infant seats (see Safety seats) . . Instrument cluster . . . . . . . standard . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel lighting up panel and interior location of components . . . Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 . . . . . . 66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, . . 61 62 34 86 73 . . . . . 110 . . . . . . 92 . . . . . 117 J Jack, positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump-starting your vehicle attaching cables. . . . . . . . . . . . disconnecting cables. . . . . . . . . . 226 219 221 K Keyless entry system locking and unlocking doors . programming entry code . . Keys positions of the ignition . . . removing from the ignition . stuck in lock position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 129 61 62 62 L Lamps bulb replacement specifications chart daytime running light system . . . dome lamps . . . . . . . . . . . flashing the lamps . . . . . . . . hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 107 111 116 118 106 Index 355 File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 Lamps (continued) high beams . . . . . . . . illuminated mirrors . . . . interior lamps. . . . . . . map lamps . . . . . . . . trailer . . . . . . . . . . Lap belts . . . . . . . . . . Lights, warning and indicator air bag . . . . . . . . . . anti-lock brakes (ABS) . . . anti-theft . . . . . . . . . brake . . . . . . . . . . charging system. . . . . . door ajar . . . . . . . . . engine oil pressure . . . . high beam . . . . . . . . lamp out . . . . . . . . . low fuel . . . . . . . . . low washer fluid . . . . . oil pressure. . . . . . . . overdrive off . . . . . . . safety belt . . . . . . . . service engine soon . . . . speed control . . . . . . . turn signal indicator. . . . Load limits GAWR . . . . . . . . . . GVWR . . . . . . . . . . trailer towing . . . . . . . Lubricant specifications . . . Luggage rack . . . . . . . . Lug nuts anti-theft . . . . . . . . . standard . . . . . . . . . tightening sequence . . . . Lumbar support pad. . . . . 356 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 209 212 331 163 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 227 228 149 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 155 110 111 216 20 79 83 90 75 76 79 77 78 89 89 88 77 90 75 80 83 82 File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 M Maintenance (see Servicing) . . . Master cylinder, brakes . . . . . Methanol in fuel . . . . . . . . MicronH air filter . . . . . . . . Mileage, calculating fuel economy Mirrors dual electric remote control . . heated . . . . . . . . . . . . vanity mirror, illuminated . . . Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . Motorcraft parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 299 267 286 270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 104 155 143 330 National Highway Traffic Safety Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 N O Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer description . . . . . . . . . . . trip odometer . . . . . . . . . Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . Oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 . . . . . . . 85 86 330 273 273 327 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, P Panic alarm feature, remote entry system . . . . . . Parking brake operation . . . . . . . warning light. . . . . . Parts (see Motorcraft Parts) PCV valve, specifications . Phone, cellular . . . . . . Power distribution box (see . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 . 205 . . 75 . 330 . 330 . 158 . 309 Index 357 File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 Power door locks . . . . . . Power features door locks . . . . . . . . lumbar support . . . . . . mirrors. . . . . . . . . . moon roof . . . . . . . . seats . . . . . . . . . . . windows . . . . . . . . . Power steering dipstick . . . . . . . . . driving with power steering fluid, checking and adding . fluid, refill capacity . . . . fluid, specifications . . . . servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 149 153 143 148 141 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 202 301 329 331 202 . . 172 . . . . . . . . . . 104 105 284 329 304 . . . . . . . . . . 135 134 135 137 136 . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . 32 . 145 . . 32 . 235 . 217 . 163 . 291 R Radio (see Electronic sound systems) . Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . Refill capacities for fluids . . . . . . Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote entry system arming and disarming the anti-theft system . . . . . . . . locking/unlocking doors . . . . . . panic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . replacement/additional transmitters. replacing the batteries . . . . . . . Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints) adult. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . 358 Index File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 S Safe driving tips . . . . . . . . . . Safety belts (see Safety restraints) . . . Safety chains, when towing a trailer . Safety Compliance Certification Label . Safety defects, reporting . . . . . . . Safety information relating to automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . Safety restraints adjusting the safety belts . . . . . automatic locking mode (retractor) . center front lap belt . . . . . . . . extension assembly . . . . . . . . for children . . . . . . . . . . . for infants . . . . . . . . . . . . for pregnant women . . . . . . . maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . replacement . . . . . . . . . . . warning light and chime . . . . . Safety seats for children and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . attaching with tether straps . . . . automatic locking mode (retractor) . in rear outboard . . . . . . . . . Seats adjusting the seat, manual . . . . . adjusting the seats, power . . . . . child safety seats . . . . . . . . . cleaning upholstery . . . . . . . . head restraints . . . . . . . . . . lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . split-folding rear seat . . . . . . . Service concerns . . . . . . . . . . Servicing your vehicle precautions when servicing . . . . servicing when you tow . . . . . . Shift-lock system . . . . . . . . . . Shift positions (see Gearshift). . . . . . . . . . . 207 . . 9 . 215 . 209 . 243 . . 268 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, . . . . . . . . . 20 13 20 21 32 32 10 22 22 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 46 13 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, . . 146 148 34 151 145 149 165 237 . . . . 192, 193, 256 216 197 198 Index 359 File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 Shoulder and lap belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . Shoulder belts (see Safety restraints). Side mirrors, heated . . . . . . . . Sliding moon roof (see Moon roof) . Spare tire changing the tire . . . . . . . . conventional spare . . . . . . . finding the spare . . . . . . . . temporary spare . . . . . . . . Spark plugs, specifications . . . . . Specification chart, lubricants . . . . Speed control accelerating . . . . . . . . . . . canceling a set speed . . . . . . indicator light . . . . . . . . . resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . resuming a set speed . . . . . . tap up/tap down . . . . . . . . turning off . . . . . . . . . . . when towing a trailer . . . . . . Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . Starting your vehicle starting a cold engine . . . . . . starting after a collision . . . . . starting a warm engine . . . . . starting your vehicle if the battery is disabled . . . . . . . . . . Steering, power . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . speed controls . . . . . . . . . tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage compartments cargo area . . . . . . . . . . . cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . center console. . . . . . . . . . locking storage . . . . . . . . . Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . 360 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 191 104 143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 223 223 222 330 331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 . 124 . . 83 . 123 . 124 123–124 . . 124 122, 216 . . . 85 . . . . 65 . . . . 68 . . . . 65 . . . . . . 217 202 . . . . . . . . . 119 . . 61 . 120 . 120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 162 156 161 332 File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 Sun visor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Supplemental air bag readiness light . . . . 79 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . 23 T Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tell Your Technician booklet . . . . . . . Temperature control (see Climate control) . Tether anchor installation (see Child restraints) . . . . . . . . . Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . Tires changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . checking the pressure . . . . . . . . . replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . tire grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing a trailer (see Trailer towing) . . . Towing your vehicle, with a tow truck . . Trailer towing calculating maximum trailer weight . . safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . trailer lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transaxle fluid, checking and adding (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tune-up specifications (VECI) . . . . . . Turn signal indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 236 . 93 . 46 120 221 289 292 291 334 293 212 232 212 215 215 216 297 329 331 . 86 326 . 82 115 Index 361 File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 V Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . Variable interval wipers . . . . VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information) decal. . . . . . Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . Ventilating your vehicle (see Climate control) . . . . Viscosity (see Engine oil) . . . . Visor (see Sun visor). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 117 . . . . . . . . . . 326 332 . . . 94, 101 . . . . . 273 . . . . . 154 W Wagon cargo cover . . . . . . . . . . . cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . liftgate window wiper and washer luggage rack . . . . . . . . . . Warm engine, starting . . . . . . . Warning chimes headlamps on. . . . . . . . . . safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . Warning lights (see Lights) . . . . . Warranties, radio . . . . . . . . . Warranty Information Booklet . . . Washer fluid rear window reservoir . . . . . . reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . warning light . . . . . . . . . . Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . . Wheels anti-theft lugnuts . . . . . . . . covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . ornaments . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 162 105 163 65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 . 283 . . 88 . 209 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . 75 . 73 190 . 4 230 229 227 225 File:fcixs.ex Update:Tue Aug 8 10:58:02 1995 Windows liftgate window. . . . . . . . . . one-touch down . . . . . . . . . power windows, operating . . . . rear, defrosting . . . . . . . . . . Windshield, defrosting. . . . . . . . Windshield washer fluid and wipers checking and adding fluid . . . . . checking and replacing wiper blades liftgate reservoir . . . . . . . . . low washer fluid light. . . . . . . operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 159 142 141 104 102 . . . . . . 283 . 285 . 284 . . 88 . 116 Index 363 File:fcgss.ex Update:Wed Dec 20 09:31:25 1995 Service Station Information [GS00300(S)08/95] twenty-two pica chart:0001113-F 364